Sharp Aquos LC-70LE755U, Aquos LC-60LE757U, Aquos LC-60LE755U, Aquos LC-70LE657U, Aquos LC-60LE657U Operation Manual
...Page 1
SHAR~
AQUOS
LIQUID CRYSTAL TELEVISION
TELEVISEUR ACL
TELEVISOR CON
PANTALLA
DE
CRISTAL LiQUIDO
OPERATION MANUAL
MODE D'EMPLOI
MANUAL DE OPERACION
NOM
1245
$
IMPORTANT : Please
read
this operation
manual
before
starting operating
the
equipment.
IMPORTANT : Veuillez
lire
ce
mode
d'emploi
avant
de
commencer a utiliser l'appareil.
IMPORTANTE : Lea
este
manual
de operaci6n
antes
de
comenzar a operar
el
equipo.
0
SmartCentral™
LC-70LE857U
LC-60LE857U
LC-70LE757U
LC-60LE757U
LC-7 755U
L
LC
..
LC-
......
IL
[I]
DOLBY.
DIGITAL PLUS
LC-70LE650U
LC-60LE650U
LC-70C7500U
LC-60C7500U
LC-7
HIGH-DEFINITION
MULTIMEDIA
INTERFACE
~db
2.0+Digital
Out
DIVX:'"
HD
(for
the
LE857U,
LE757U,
LE755U
and
657U
models)
Page 2
Skype"'
is supported by this
TV
set. For
details,
refer
to
the following:
•
http:
//www
.sharpusa.com (for the operation manual)
•
http:
//
freetalk.me/producVsharp/ (for information
on
the communication camera)
•
http://www.skype.com (for details
on Skype)
Ce
televlseur
est
compatible
avec Skypen•.
Pour
les details,
reportez-vous
a\:
•
http:
//www.s
harpusa.com (
pour
le
mode
d'emplo
i)
• h
ttp
://
freetalk.me/producVsharp/ (pour des informations sur
Ia
camera
de
communication)
•
http://www.skype.
com
(pour
l
es
details
s
ur
Skype)
Skype"'
es
compatible con este
televisor. Para conocer
mas detalles, consulte:
•
http://www.sharpusa.com (para
el
manual
de
operaci6n)
•
http://freetalk.me/producVsha
rp/
(para obtener
mas informacion sobre
Ia
camara
de
comunicaci6n)
•
http://www.skype.com (para conocer
detalles
de
Skype)
Page 3
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
To
aid reporting
in
case
of
loss
or
theft,
please record the
"TV's
model
and
serial numbers in the space provided.
The numbers are
located
at
the
rear and
left
side
of
the
Tv.
I
Model
No
.,
Sen"
No.,
WARNING:
TO
REDUCE THE
RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO
NOT
EXPOSE THIS
PRODUCT
TO
RAIN OR MOISTURE.
A ,
...
,.,,,"'_
.,
·~·-
symbol,
within an
equilateral
A
"IIIlO
A
triangle, is intended
to
alert
the
~
RISK
OF
ELECTRIC
SHOCK
I
user
to
the presence
of
uninsulated "dangerous voltage"
DO
NOT OPEN
within the product's enclosure that
may be
of
sufficient magnitude
to
constitute a risk
of
electric shock
to
persons.
CAUTION: TO
REDUCE THE
RISK
OF
ELECTRIC
SHOCK
,
A
Tho~''-"""""'""
'
'"'
"
•
DO NOT REMOVE COVER
(OR
BACK).
triangle
is intended
to
alert
the
NO
USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
user to the presence
of
important
REFER
SERVICING
TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE
operating and maintenance
PERSONNEL.
(servicing) instructions in the
literature
accompanying the
product.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH
WIDE
BLADE
OF PLUG TO WIDE
SLOT, FULLY
INSERT.
WARNING:
FCC
Regulations state that any unauthorized changes
or
modifications
to
this
equipment not
expressly
approved by the manufacturer
could
void the user's authority
to operate this equipment.
CAUTION:
This product satisfies
FCC
regulations when
shielded cables
and connectors are used
to
connect the unit
to
other equipment.
To
prevent electromagnetic interference with
electric
appliances
such as radios and televisions, use
shielded cables and connectors
for connections.
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY:
SHARP LIQUID
CRYSTAL
TELEVISION, MODEL
LC-70LE857U/LC-60LE857U/LC-70LE757U/
LC-60LE757U/LC-70LE755U/LC-60LE755U/LC-70LE657U/LC-60LE657U/LC-70LE650U/
LC-60LE650U/LC-70C7500U/LC-60C7500U/LC-70C6500U/LC-60C6500U
This device
complies with Part
15 of the FCC
Rules.
Operation is subject
to
the following
two
conditions:
(1)
This device may not cause
harmful
interference, and
(2)
this device must accept any interference
received,
including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
RESPONSIBLE
PARTY:
SHARP ELECTRONICS
CORPORATION
Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, New Jersey
07
495-1163
TEL:
1-800-BE-SHARP
For
Business Customers: URL
htt12:!/www.
shar12usa.com
INFORMATION:
This equipment has been tested and found
to
comply
with the
limits
for a
Class B
digital
device,
pursuant
to
Part
15
of
the FCC
Ru
l
es
.
These
limits
are designed
to
provide
reasonable
protection
against
harmful interference in
a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause
harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will
not occur
in
a
particular
installation.
If
this equipment does cause
harmful
interference
to
radio
or
television
reception, which can be determined
by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged
to
try
to
correct t
he
interference
by
one
or
more
of
the
following
measures:
- Reorient
or
relocate
the receiving antenna.
-
Increase
the
separation between the equipment and receiver.
-Connect
t
he
equipment into
an
outlet
on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
-
Consult
the
dealer
or
an experienced radio/TV technician
for
help.
FCC
Compliance
Statement
This device
complies
with part 15 of the
FCC
Rules.
Operation is subject
to
the
fo
ll
owing
two conditions:
(1)
This device may
not
cause
harmful
interference, and
(2)
this device must accept any interference
received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Wireless
Radio
For product
available
in the USA/Canada market,
only channel
1-11 can be operated.
Selection
of
other
channels
is not
possible.
This device is going
to
be operated in 5.15-5.25GHz frequency range,
it
is restricted in indoor environment
only.
Important:
Any changes or modifications not expressly
approved
by
the party responsible for
compliance could
void the user's authority
to
operate the equipment.
FCC
Radiation
Exposure
Statement: This equipment
complies with FCC radiation exposure
limits
set
forth for
an
uncontrolled environment. This equipment
should
be
installed and operated with minim
um
distance
20cm
between
the
radiator
&
your body.
Industry
Canada
Statement
This Class
B
digital
apparatus complies with CAN
ICES-003(B)/NMB-3(B)
Wireless
Radio
For product
available
in the USA/Canada market,
only channel
1-11 can be operated.
Selection
of
other
channels
is
not
possible.
The device
could
automatically discontinue transmission in case
of
absen
ce
of information
to
transmit,
or
operational failure.
Note that this is not intended
to
prohibit transmission
of
control
or
signaling
information or the use
of
repetiti
ve
codes where required by the technology.
Important:
Any changes
or
modifications not expressly
approved
by
the party responsible for
compliance could
void
the
user's authority
to
operate the equipment.
IC
Radiation
Exposure
Statement:
This device
complies
with
IC
RSS-21
0 rules;
Operation is subject
to
the
following
two
conditions:
(1)
This device may
not
cause
harmful
interference, and (
2)
this device must accept interference
recieved,
including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
This product contains a CR Coin Lithium Battery which contains
Perchlorate Material
-
special
handling
may
apply, California residents,
See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
I
U.S.A.
ONLY
I
"Note
to
CATV system
installer:
This reminder
is provided
to
call
the CATV system installer's attention
to
Article 820 of the National Electrical
Code that provides
guidelines
for proper grounding and,
in
particular,
specifies
that
the cable
ground
shall be connected
to
the
grounding system of the building,
as
close
to
the point
of
cable
entry as
practical."
This product
qualifies
for
ENERGY
STAR
when
"Home"
is
selected
for
"TV
Location" .
Setting
"TV
Location"
to
"Home" allows
the
TV
to
achieve an energy-saving status f
or
household
use.
@-1
Page 4
DEAR
SHARP CUSTOMER
Thank you for your purchase
of
the Sharp
Liquid
Crystal
Television. To ensure safety and many
years
of
trouble-free operation of your product, please read
the
Important
Safety
Instructions
carefully before using this product.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Electricity is used
to
perform
many useful func
tions
,
but
it
can also cause personal
in
juries and
property
damage
if
improperly handled.
This
product
has been engineered
and
manuf
ac
tur
ed with
the
highest priority
on
safety. However,
improper
use can result in
elec
tr
ic
shock
and/or
f
ir
e.
In
order
to
prevent potential danger, please observe
the
following
instructions when installing, operating
and
cleaning
the
product.
To
ensure
your
safety and prolong
the
service life
of
your
Liquid Crystal
Television, please read
the
following
precautions carefully before
us
i
ng
the
product.
1) Read these instructions.
2) Keep these instructions.
3) Heed
all
warnings.
4)
Follow all
instructions.
5)
Do
not
use this
apparatus
near water.
6) Clean only with
dry
cloth.
7) Do
not
block
any
ventilation openings.
Install
in
accordance
with
the manufacturer's instructions.
8)
Do
not
install
near
any
heat sources
such
as
radiators, heat registers, stoves,
or
other
apparatus
(including amplifiers)
that
produce
heat.
9) Do not defeat the safety purpose
of
the polarized
or
grounding-
type
plug. A polarized plug has two
blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type
plug
has
two
blades and a third grounding
prong. The wide blade
or
the
th
ird prong are provided for your safety.
If
the provided plug does not fit
into your outlet, consult an electrician
for
replacement
of
the obsolete outlet.
1
0)
Protect
the
power
cord
from being
walked
on
or
pinched particularly
at
plugs, convenience
receptacles, and
the
point
where
they
exit from the apparatus.
11)
Only
use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
12) Use
only
with
the
cart, stand, tripod, bracket,
or
table specified
by
the
manufa
c
tu
r
er
,
®
or
sold with
the
apparatus. When a
cart
is used, use caution
when
moving
the
cart/
apparatus
combination
to
avoid injury
from
tip-over.
13) Unplug this
apparatus
during lightning st
orms
or
when unused
for
long
periods
of
time
.
14) Refer
all
servicing
to
qualified
service personne
l.
Servicing is
req
uired
when
the
appara
tus has
been damaged in
any
way,
such
as
power
-supply
cord
or
plug is damaged, liquid
has
been
spilled
or
objects
have
fallen
into
the
apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed
to
rain
or
moisture,
does
not
operate
normally,
or
has been
dropped
.
Additional
Safety
Information
15)
Power
Sources-
This product should
be
operated only from
the
type
of
power
source indicated
on the marking
label. If
you are not sure
of
the type
of
power supply
to
your home, consult your
product dealer
or
local
power company. For products intended
to
operate from battery power, or
other sources, refer
to
the operating instructions.
16)
Overloading-Do
not
overload
wall
outlets, extension cords,
or
integral
conven
i
ence
receptacles
as this can result in a risk
of
fire
or
electr
ic shock.
17)
Object
and Liquid
Entry-Never
push
ob
j
ects
of
any kind
into
this
product
through
openings as
they may
touch
dangerous voltage
points
or
short-out parts
that
could
result in a fire
or
electric
shock. Never
spill
liquid
of
any
kind
on
the
product.
18)
Damage Requiring
Service-Unplug
this
product from
the
wall
outlet
and
refer servicing
to
qualified service personnel
under
the
following conditions:
®-2
a)
When
the
ACcord
or
plug
is
damaged
,
b)
If liquid
has
been
spilled,
or
objects
have fallen
into
the
product,
c)
If
the
product
has been exposed
to
rain
or
water,
d) If
the product does not operate
normally
by following the operating instructions.
Adjust only those controls that
are
covered by the operating instructions as
an
improper adjustment
of
other controls may result
in
damage and
will
often require extensive work by a qualified technician
to
restore the product to its normal operation,
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
e)
If
the
product
has been
dropped
or
damaged in any
way
, and
f)
When
the
produ
ct
exhibits a di
st
i
nct
change in performance -
th
is
in
di
ca
tes a need
fo
r
service.
19) Replacement
Parts-W
h
en
replacement
parts
ar
e required,
be
sure the service technician has
used replacement parts specified
by
the manu
fac
turer
or
have
the
sa
me
characteristics
as
th
e
original
part
. Unauthorized substi
tut
i
ons
may
resu
lt
in fi
re
, el
ect
ric
sho
ck,
or other hazards.
20) Saf
ety
Check-Upon
co
mpletion
of
any servi
ce
or repai
rs
to this
pro
du
ct,
ask
the se
rv
ice
t
ec
hnician
to
perform
sa
fe
ty
checks
to
de
t
er
mine
that
the
product
is in
pro
per operating
condition.
21) Wall
or
ceiling mounti
ng-When
mounting
the
product
on
a
wall
or
ceiling,
be
sure to ins
ta
ll
the
product
accordi
ng to the method recom
me
nd
ed
by
the
ma
nuf
ac
turer.
• Ou
tdoor
Antenna Grounding -
If
an outside
antenna is
connected
to
the television
equi
pme
nt, be sure the an
te
nna system is
grou
nd
ed
so
as
to
provi
de
some protection
against voltage surges and buil
t-
up
static
charges.
Article
810
of
the National El
ec
t
ri
cal Code,
ANSIINFPA 70,
provides in
fo
r
ma
tion with
regard
to
pr
oper grounding of the mast and
supporting s
tr
ucture, grounding of the lead-
in wire
to
an antenna discharge unit, size of
grounding
co
nductor
s,
locati
on
of an
te
nna-
discharge unit,
co
nnection
to
grounding
electrodes,
and
requi
re
ments for the
grou
nd
in
g electrode.
EXAMPLE
OF
ANTE
NNA
GRO
UNDING
AS
PER
NA
TIONAL ELECTRI
CA
L
CODE.
ANSI/NFPA 70
ANTENNA
LEA
D
IN
WI
RE
A
NTE
NNA
DI
SCHARGE
UNIT
(N
EG
SEC
TI
ON
810-20)
GRO
UNDING
CO
NDUCTORS
(
NE
G
SE
CTION
810-21)
"-
-
POWE
R
SERV
I
CE
G
RO
UNDING
ELECTRODE
SYS
TE
M
(NEG ART
25
0)
NEG
- NATIONAL
ELE
CTRICAL
COD
E
• Water and Moisture - Do not use this product near
wa
ter - f
or
example, near a bath
tub,
wash b
ow
l,
kitchen sink , or laundry tub; in a w
et
basement; or near a
sw
i
mmi
ng pool; and the like.
•
St
and
- Do not
place the pr
od
uct on an unstable cart, stand, tripod or
ta
ble.
Placing
the product on an
u
ns
table
ba
se can
ca
use the pro
du
ct to
fa
ll,
resulting in serious personal injuries as
well
as damage
to
the
product. Use o
nl
y a cart, stand,
tr
ipod, bracket or tab
le
recommended by the manufacturer or
sold wi
th
the product.
Wh
en mounting the produ
ct
on a
wall,
be sure to
follow
th
e manufactu
re
r's instructions. Use
only the mou
nt
ing hardware recomm
en
ded by the manufacturer.
• Selecting
th
e l
oca
tion -
Select
a place with
no
dir
ec
t
su
nlight and
good
ventilation.
•
Ven
tilation
-Th
e vents and other o
pe
nings in the
ca
binet are d
es
igned for ventilation. Do not
co
ver
or
bl
ock
these vents and o
pe
nings sin
ce
insufficient vent
il
ation can cause overheat
in
g and
/or
shorten
the
life
of the product. Do not place the pr
od
uct
on
a
bed,
sofa, rug or other similar surface, since they
c
an
bl
oc
k ventilation openings. This product is not designed for built-in insta
ll
ation;
do
not place the
product in an enclosed place such as a b
oo
kcase or r
ac
k, unle
ss
proper ventilation is provided or the
manufacturer's instruct
io
ns are fo
ll
owed.
•
The front pan
el used
in
this pro
du
ct is made
of
glass. There
fo
re,
it
can break when the
pr
oduct is
dropped
or
ap
plied with impact. Be
ca
reful n
ot
to
be injured
by
broken glass pieces in case the panel
breaks.
•
Heat - The
pro
duct
sho
ul
d
be
situated away from heat
so
urces such as radiators, heat registers,
stoves,
or
other products (including a
mp
li
fi
ers) that produce heat.
•
The Liquid Crystal pa
ne
l is a very high technology produ
ct
with
2,073,600 pixels,
giving you f
in
e pi
ctur
e
details.Occasion
al
l
y,
a
fe
w non-active pix
el
s may appear on the screen as a fixed point
of
blue,
green,
red
or
yellow
(LE
857U,
LE
757U, LE755U and
C7500U
m
od
el
s);
blue,
green
or
red (
LE
657U,
LE650U
and
C6500U model
s)
.
Please
note th
at th
is
does not affect the performance of your product.
• Lig
htning - For added prot
ec
tion for this television equipment duri
ng
a lightning storm,
or
when it is
left
unatten
ded
and unused f
or
long periods
of
time, unplug it from the
wa
ll
ou
tlet and disconnect the
antenna. This
wi
ll
prevent damage to the equipment
du
e to
li
gh
tn
i
ng
and po
we
r-line surges.
•
Pow
er
Lines - An outside an
te
nna system should n
ot
be l
oca
ted in the vicinity of overhead power
lines or other elec
tr
ic
light
or
power cir cuit
s,
or where it
ca
n
fa
ll
into such
powe
r lines
or
circuits. When
insta
lli
ng an
out
side antenna system, e
xt
reme
ca
re should be
ta
ken
to
keep
fr
om
to
uching
su
ch
po
wer
li
nes or circuits as contact with
th
em might be
fatal.
Page 5
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
•
To prevent fire, never place any type of candle
or
flames
on
the
top
or
near the
lV
set.
•
To
prevent fire or
shock
hazard,
do
not place the
ACcord
under
the
lV
set
or
other heavy items.
•
Do
not display a
still
picture for a long time, as this could cause an afterimage
to
remain.
b
•
To prevent fire or
shock
hazard,
do
not expose this product
to
dripping
or
splashing. No
,
objects
filled
with
liquids,
such as vases, should be placed on the
produc
t. '
"
• Do not insert foreign objects into the product.
Inserting
objects
in
the
air vents
or
other
openings may result in fire
or
electric shock. Exercise special caution
whe
n using the
product around children.
Precautions when transporting the TV
•
When transporting the
'TV
,
never carry
it
by holding or otherwise putting pressure onto the
display.
Be
sure
to
always carry the
'TV
by two people
holding
it with two hands -
one
hand
on
each
side
of the
'TV.
Caring
for
the
cabinet
•
Use a soft cloth (cotton, flannel, etc.) and gently wipe the surface
of
the cabinet.
• Using a chemical cloth (wet/dry sheet type cloth, etc.) may deform
the
components of the main unit cabinet
or cause cracking.
•
Wiping with a hard cloth
or
using strong force may scratch the surface
of
the cabinet.
• If
the cabinet
is
very dirty, wi
pe
with a soft cloth (cotton, flannel, etc.) soaked
in
neutral detergent diluted
with water and thoroughly wrung out, and then wipe with a soft
dry
cloth.
•
Avoid using benzene, thinner, and other solvents, as these may deform the cabinet and cause the pai
nt
to
peel off.
•
Do
not apply insecticides
or
other volatile liquids.
Also,
do
not
allow
the cabinet
to
remain
in
contact with rubber
or
vinyl products for a long
pe
ri
od
of
time.
Plasticizers inside the plastic may cause the cabinet
to
deform and cause the paint
to
peel off.
Caring
for
the
front
panel
•
Turn off the main
power
and unplug the
ACcord
from the wall outlet before handling.
•
Gently wipe the surface of the front panel with a soft cloth (cotton, flannel, etc.).
~
To protect the front panel,
do
not use a dirty cloth, liquid cleaners,
or
a chemical
cloth (wet/dry sheet type cloth, etc.). This may damage the surface
of
the front
panel.
•
Wiping with a hard cloth
or
using strong force may scratch the surface
of
the front
panel.
•
Use a soft damp cloth
to
gently wipe the front panel when it is
really
dirty.(lt may scratch the surface of
the front panel when wiped strongly.)
• If
the front panel is dusty, use an anti-static brush, which
is
commercially available,
to
clean it.
•
To
avoid scratching the frame or screen, please use a soft, lint free cloth for cleaning. Approved cleaning
cloths are available directly from
Sharp
in
single
(OOZ-LCD-CLOTH)
or
triple
(OOZ-LCD-CLOTH-3) packs.
Caii1-800-BE-SHARP
for ordering, or VISIT
http
://
www.sharpusa.
com
/SharpDirect.
CHILD
SAFETY:
PROPER TELEVISION PLACEMENT
MATTERS
THE
CONSUMER
ELECTRONICS INDUSTRY CARES
•
Manufacturers, retailers and the rest
of
the consumer electroni
cs
industry are
committed
to
making home entertainment safe and enjoyable.
•
As you enjoy your television, please note that
all televisio
ns
-
new
and old-
mus
t
be supported
on
proper stands
or
installed according
to
the
manufacturer's
recommendations. Televisions t
ha
t are inappropriately si
tu
ated on dressers ,
bookcases, shelves, desks, speakers, chests, carts, etc., may
fall over, resulting
in
injury.
TUNE
IN
TO
SAFETY
•
ALWAYS
follow
the manufacturer's recommendati
ons
for the safe install
at
ion
of
your television.
•
ALWAYS
read and
follow
all
instructions for proper use of your television.
•
NEVER
allow
children
to
climb on
or
play on the television
or
the furniture
on
which the television is placed.
•
NEVER
place the television
on
furniture
tha
t can eas
il
y
be
used
as
steps,
suc
h
as a chest
of
drawers.
• ALWAYS
install the television where it cannot be pushed,
pulled
over
or
knocked down.
•
ALWAYS
route cords and cables
co
nnected
to
the television so that they
cannot
be
tripped over,
pu
ll
ed
or
grabbed.
WALL
OR
CEILING
MOUNT
YOUR
TELEVISION
• ALWAYS
contact your re
ta
iler
about
professional installation if you have any
do
ubts
abo
ut
your ability
to
safely mount your
te
levision.
•
ALWAYS
use a mount that has been recommended
by
th
e television
manufacturer and has a safety certification by an
in
dep
endent laboratory (such
as
UL
,
CSA, ETL
).
•
ALWAYS
follow
all
instructio
ns
supplied
by the television and mount
manufac
tur
ers.
•
ALWAYS
make sure that
the
wall
or
ceiling where you are
mo
unting the
te
lev
is
ion is appropriate.
Some
m
ou
nts are not designed
to
be mounted
to
walls
and
cei
li
ngs
with steel
studs
or
cinder block constru
ct
i
on
. If
you are unsure,
co
n
tact
a professional
installer.
•
Televisions can be hea
vy.
A mini
mu
m of
two
people is required for a
wall
or
ceiling mount installation.
MOVING
AN
OLDER TELEVISION TO
A NEW PLACE
IN
YOUR
HOME
•
Many new television buyers move their older CRT
televisions into a secondary
room after the purchase
of
a flat-panel telev
isi
on. Spec
ial
care should be
mad
e
in the placement
of
older CRT
televisions.
•
ALWAYS
place your o
ld
er CRT
te
levision on furniture th
at
is sturdy and
appropriate for its size and weight.
•
NEVER
place your older
CRT television on a dresser
whe
re children
ma
y
be
tempted
to
use the drawers
to
climb.
•
ALWAYS
make sure your older
CRT
television does not hang over
the
edge
of
your furniture.
CE.org/safety
®-3
Page 6
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
30
Glasses (for the LE857U, LE757U, LE755U and LE657U models)
Prevention of accidental ingestion
•
Keep
the
accessory
out
of
the reach
of
small
ch
ildren.
Small
children can accidentally
swallow
these
parts.
- If
a
child
accidentally
swa
ll
ows
any
of
these parts, seek immediate
med
ical
attention.
Do
not disassemble
•
Do
not
disassemble
or
modify
the
3D
Glasses except
when
recycling t
he
batteries.
Do
no
t
mod
ify
the
3D
Glasses.
Handling the
30
Glasses
• Do
not
drop, exert pressure on, or step
on
the
3D
Glasses. Doing
so
may
damage
the
gl
ass
section,
which
may
result
in
th
e risk
of
injury.
•
Be
careful
not
to
trap
your
finger in
the
hinge section
of
the
3D Glasses. Doing
so
may
result in injury.
- Pay special attention when children are using this product.
Caution
for lithium battery
• Batteries must
not
be
exposed
to
excessive heat such
as
direct sunli
gh
t or fire.
• Replace only
with
the
same
or
equivalent t
ype
of battery. The battery
may
explode
if
imp
roper
ly replaced.
• Take care not
to
reverse
the
battery
poles(+
and-)
when
loading
the
battery.
Follow
the correct
procedure when
load
ing
the
battery. Loading the battery
in
correctly
may
damage
the
batte
ry
or
ca
use it
to
leak
battery fluid,
which
could result
in
a fire, injury
or
damage.
Using the
30
Glasses
•
Use
of
the
3D
Glasses should
be
limited
to
a maximum of 3 hours,
and
in any case no
more
than
one
movie.
•
Use only
the
3D
Glasses
r
ec
ommended
for
th
is TV.
•
Use
the
3D
Glasses only for
the
specified purpose.
•
Do
not
move
around while
wearing
the
3D
Glasses.
The surrounding area may appear
da
rk, which may
result
in
falling
or
other accidents
that
may
cause injury.
Caring
for the
30
Glasses
•
Use
only
the
cloth
pro
vi
ded
with
th
e
3D
Glasses
to
clean
the
lenses.
Remove
dust
and
so
il
from the
cloth.
Any
dust
or
other soiling
on
the
cloth
ma
y
result
in scratches.
Do
not use
solvents
su
ch
as
benzene
or
thinners
as
doing
so
may
cause
the
coating
to
peel off.
•
When
cleaning
the 3D
Glasses,
take care
not
to
allow
water
or
othe
r f
lu
i
ds
to
come
into contact with
the
glasses.
• Always
store
the
3D
Glasses in
the
case provided when
not
in use.
•
When storing
the
3D
Glasses,
avoid very
humid
or
hot
lo
cations.
Viewing
30
images
• If
you experience dizziness, nausea,
or
other
discomfort
while
viewing 3D images,
discont
inue use and
rest
your
eyes.
•
Do
not
use the
3D
Glasses
if they are
cracked
or
broken.
~WARNIN
G
DO
NOT
INGEST
BATTERY,
CHEMICAL
BURN HAZARD
"This
product contains a
co
in/button cell
battery.
If
the coin/button
cell
ba
ttery
is
swallowed,
it can cause
seve
re
internal burns
in
just 2 hours and can
lead
to death. Keep
new
and used batt
er
i
es
away from
children.
If
the battery compartment does
not
close
securely, stop using
the product and
keep
it away
from children.
If
you think batteries might have been
swallowed
or
placed
inside any
part
of
the body, seek
immediate
medical attention."
®-4
Accessories
Supplied
Accessories
Make sure the following
a
ccesso
ries are
pro
vided wi
th
t
he
pr
odu
ct.
uo
~0
0
C::J
iii
i\TT!
nlftrt
1111
Page
6
Page
7
•
Operation
manual
(thi
s pub
li
cation)
• Connect
io
n guide
.Stand'unit
l~
t)
(for LC-
70
LE8!57U
/
. LC-60
LE857U)
~~~
'ff'ff'ffinn
~
Page
6
, .
~
·
'\'
~
·
.. , , .
,c('')~
·
,
·
"'~1»;><·d
·
.:
.,
..
,
. :.·
30G
i
a~
:
(li.2
)'
:
'="=~'~~u
!
'
.
1
i (fortlfi6LES5.7U; LE757U
,!
·
LJ?755U
and
'l
E657U models)
For
deta
il
s,
refer to the
operati
on
manua
l.
•
Operation
manual
tor the
30
G
las
ses
(t
or the LE857U, LE757U, LE755U and LE657U
mod
els)
•
Al
ways
use the AC
cord
supplied
with the
TV
.
•
The
il
lustrations
above a
re
tor explanation purposes and may vary
sl
ightly
from the
actu
al
accessories.
Optional
Accessories
The
li
sted
optional accessories are available
f
or
the
Liquid Crystal
Tel
ev
isi
on
. Please
purchase
them
at
your nearest shop.
•
Additio
nal
optional
accessories may be
avai
lable
in the
nea
r futur
e.
When purchasing,
pl
ease
read t
he
newest
catalogue tor
compatibi
li
ty
and check the
availab
il
i
ty.
Part name
Wall
mount
b
ra
cket
30
Gla
sses
Model
number
AN
-52AG4
(for
LC
-70LE857U/LC-60LE857U/
LC-70
LE
757U/
LC
-60LE7
57U
/
LC-70LE755U/
LC
-6
0LE755U/
LC-70L
E657U
/
LC
-6
0LE
657
U/
LC-70LE650U/
LC
-
60
LE
65
0U/
LC-70C7500U/LC-60C7500U/
LC-70C65
00U
/LC-60C6500U)
AN-30G
40
(for
the
LE
857
U, LE75
7U
,
LE755U
an
d
LE
657U
model
s)
Page 7
Contents
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
...................
1
DEAR SHARP CUSTOMER
.....................
2
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
......
2-4
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Supplied Accessories . . . .
.. . .. ..
..
..
. . . . . . . . 4
Optional Accessories.
.. . ..
. . . .
..
..
..
. . .
..
..
. 4
QUICK REFERENCE
Attaching the Stand
.......................
6-7
QUICK INSTALLATION
llPS
................
7
Experiencing HD
Images
..
..................
7
Installing Batteries in the Remote Control
Unit
.......................................
8
Using the Remote Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Preparation
Antennas
...................................
8
Part Names
lV
(Front)
...........................
.
.......
9
lV
(Side)
....................................
9
lV
(Rear)
....................................
9
Remote Control Unit .
.. . ..
..
..
..
.. . .. . .. ..
. 1 0
Introduction
to
Connections
Types
of
Connection
.......................
11
Displaying an External Equipment Image . . .
11
Connecting
to
External Equipment
Connecting a Blu-ray Disc/DVD Player
or
HD Cable/Satellite Set-top Box
...........
12
Connecting a VCR,
Game
Console,
Camcorder or Cable/Sate
lli
te Set-top Box ...
12
Connecting a Surround Syste
m/
Audio System .
..
. .
..
..
.. . ..
.. ..
.. . .. .. .. . 13
Connecting a PC
.......
...
.................
13
Watching
TV
Turning On/Off the Power
..................
14
Initial Installation.
..
.. . ..
..
.. . ..
. . . .
..
. . . 14-15
Direct Button Operation
Changing Channels
.........
...........
16
Changing Volume
......
. . . .............
16
MUTE ..................................
16
FREEZE ......
........
...
.......
.....
...
16
INPUT ........
..........................
16
FLASHBACK .
........
...............
...
16
SmartCentral. .
..
..
.. . ..
..
. .
.. . ..
. .
..
. . .
16
NETFLIX
.. ..
...........................
17
AUDIO ...
...
...........
.. ....
..........
17
Sleep Timer . . .
..
.. .. ..
. . .
..
..
..
. . .
..
. . .
17
AVMODE .................
...
..........
17
Closed Captions and Digital Closed
Captions
....
.........................
18
VIEW MODE .............
......
.... 18-
19
On-Screen Display Menu
On-Screen Display Menu Operation
........
20
Menu Operation Buttons
...................
20
Menu Items .
...............................
21
Picture Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2-23
Audio Settings
.. ...........
................
23
Pow
er Control ..
...........................
24
System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
4-26
Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26-28
Information ....
......................... 28-30
Enjoying
3D
Image Viewing (for the LE857U,
LE757U, LE755U and LE657U models)
Display Methods for 3D and
2D
Images ....
31
Viewing
3D
Images
..........
.. . . . . . .
...
31-3
2
Configuring
the
lV
Settings
to
Enhance
3D
Image Viewing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32-33
Enjoying Photo/MusicNideo Playback
Connecting a USB Memory Device/
USB Hard Drive
..
..
.. . ..
.. . .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
33
Connecting a Home Network (DLNA) Se
rve
r ..
34
Selecting the Folders
to Play Back
.........
34
Playing Back Files on a USB Memory Device/
Home Network (DLNA) Server. . . . . . . .
35-37
Playing
Back
Files from a
Portable Device or PC
......
...
...........
37
Other Viewing Options
Presetting Remote Control Function ........
38
Operating the Connected Equipment .....
..
39
Using AQUOS LINK
Controlling HDMI Equipment
Using
AQUOS LINK . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
39-
40
Link Operation Menu . . . . .
.. . .. .. ..
. . . . . 40-41
Using a Smartphone with the
lV
..........
.
41
Using a PC
Adjusting the PC Ima
ge ....................
42
Setting Audio
Input
.................
. . ....
..
42
Control of
the
lV.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2-4
3
PC
Co
mpatibility Chart
.....................
43
Using the Internet
Co
nnecting
to
the Internet
...............
.. . 44
Internet Setup
..
...........
......
....... 44-4
5
AOUOS Advantage Live
....................
45
Entering Text (Software Keyboard)
........
. 45
Using t
he
Browser .
.. ..
. . . .
..
. . .
..
. .
.. . 46
-4 7
Using Keybcard and Mouse
................
4 7
Using Applications via
the Internet ....
......
4 7
DISCLAIMERS
..
.......
..............
.. 48
Appendix
Removing the Stand .
......
...
......... ....
49
Setting the
lV
on the Wa
ll
................
.. 50
Troubleshooting
.......
....
.............
....
51
Troubleshooti
ng-3D
Images (for
the
LE857U,
LE757U, LE755U a
nd LE657
U models)
...
51
Troubleshooting - Error Message
....
.......
52
Information
on
the Software License for
This Pr
odu
ct .....................
........
52
Specifications
lV
.....................
..
.................
. 53
Wireless LAN
..
....
........
...
............
. 54
Bluetooth
..................
....
............
54
Trademarks
....................................
55
Calling for Service
.............................
56
LIMITED WARRANTY
..........................
56
Dimensional Drawings
• The dimensional drawin
gs
for the LCD
TV
set are
shown on the inside
ba
ck
cov
er.
• The illustrations and on-s
cr
een displays in this operation manual are for explanation purposes
and may
vary slightly from the ac
tu
al operations.
•
The
examples used throughout this manual are bas
ed
on
the LC-60LE
650U mode
l.
@-
5
Page 8
QUICK
REFERENCE
Attaching the Stand
• Before attaching (or detaching) the stand,
unplug
the
AC cord.
• Before performing
work
spread cushioning
over
the
base area
to
lay
the
1V on. This will prevent it f
rom
being damaged.
CifJliiMI•
•
Be
sure
to
follow
the
instructions. Incorrect installation of the stand
may
result in
the
TV
falling over.
• LC-70LE857U/LC-60LE857U
1
Confirm
that there are 9 screws
(4
long
screws
,
4
middle
screws
and
1 short screw) supplied
with
the
stand unit.
2 At1ach
the
supporting post for the stand unit
onto
the
base as
shown
below
.
•
The supporting post attaches to the base at an
offcentered
location on the
base.
Be
sure
to
attach
the supporting post in the direction indicated
below
and
attach the stand to the
lV
with the
wider side of the base facing forward.
3 Insert
the
stand into
the
openings
on
the rear
of
the
lV.
•
Make
sure
that the
stand
is
firmly
inserted
into the
lV.
Improper
installation
may
result
in
tilting of the
lV
set.
4
®-6
5
CD
Insert
the
stand cover.
® Insert
the
screw
to
secure
the stand
cover.
~
~~
:rscrew
• LC-70LE757U/LC-60LE757U/LC-70LE755U/
LC-60LE755U/LC-70C7500U/LC-60C7500U
1 Confirm that there are 12
screws
(6 long screws,
4
middle screws
and
2 short screws) supplied
with the stand unit.
2
G)
Set the
post
for
the stand unit o
nto
the
polystyrene foam.
® At1ach
the
base
to
the
pos
t.
® Insert
and
tighten the 6
screws into
the
6
holes
on
the bot1om
of
the
base
.
®
•
• Hold the stand unit securely with one hand,
and then tighten the screws.
Long
screws
@ I
1tn......_J
3 Insert the stand into
the
openings
on
the
rear
of
the
lV.
• Make sure that the
sta
nd
is
firmly inserted into t
he
lV.
Improper insta
lla
tion may result in tilti
ng
of the
lVset.
4
In
sert and tighten
the 4 sc
rews into the 4 holes
on
the
rear
of
the stand unit.
5
G)
In
sert the stand
cover
.
® Insert
the 2 sc
rews to secure the
sta
nd cover.
1
~
~
jShort scre
ws
' .
Page 9
QUICK
REFERENCE
•
LC-70LE657U/LC-60LE657U/LC-70LE650U/
LC-60LE650U/LC-70C6500U/LC-60C6500U
1
Confirm
that
there are
12
screws
(8 long
screws
and
4 short screws)
supplied
with the
stand
unit.
2
CD
Set
the
post
for
the
stand unit
onto
the
polystyrene
foam.
®
Attach
the
base
to
the
post.
@
Insert
and
tighten
the
8
screws
into
the
8
holes
on
the
bottom
of
the
base.
• Hold the stand unit securely with one hand,
and then tighten the screws.
•
LC-70LE657U/LC-70LE650U/LC-70C6500U
•
LC-60LE657U/LC-60LE650U/LC-60C6500U
3
CD
Insert
the
stand into
the
openings
on
the
bottom
of
the
1V.
•
Make sure that the stand is
firmly inserted into
the
TV
. Improper
installation may r
esult in tilting
of the TV set.
®
Insert
and tighten
the
4
screws
into
the 4
holes
on
the rear
of
the
1V.
?'~~
...
l~
Soft
cushion
r1
®n
-4--
Short
screws
•
In
the installation procedure, be careful not to catch your fingers between the
TV set and the floor.
•
Do not remove the stand from the TV
unless
using an
optional wall
mount bracket to mount it.
•
After attaching the stand
to
the
TV,
do not
hold
the
stand when
you
put up, set up, move
or
lay down the TV.
QUICK INSTALLATION TIPS
1
Atta
ch
yo
ur
antenna
to
the
back
of
the
television.
(See page 8.)
2
Connect
the
AC
plug
f
or
t
he
tel
ev
ision
in
to
the
AC
outlet.
• Place
the
TV
close
to
the
AC
outlet, and keep the
power
p
lu
g
within reach.
• LC-70LE657U/LC-70LE650U/LC-70C6500U
I
AC
outlet
I
§
• LC-60LE657U/LC-60LE650U/LC-60C6500U
Bundle
t
he
cords
properly
with
t
he
cable
tie.
•
When bundling the
cords, use the
AC
cord holder
mounted
on
the
TV
. Relocate from
®to®
.
• LC-70LE857UILC-60LE857U
Remove
and
loo
sen
®
<D·~
f•
®
- ® •
f
"\iil
(j)
<D
(j)
Att
ach
and
bu
nd
le together
• LC-70LE757U/LC-60LE757U/
LC-70LE755U/LC-60LE755U/
LC-70C7500U/LC-60C7500U
Re
move
and
loosen
®
<D·
.
~®
f•
®
f .....
(j)
<D
(j)
Attach
and
bundle together
mm
•
TO
PREVENT
RISK
OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO
NOT
TOUCH
UN-INSULATED PARTS OF
ANY
CABLES
WITH
THE AC
CORD
CONNECTED.
3
When turning
on
the
1V
f
or
the
first time, pr
ess
POWER
on
the
telev
is
ion.
POWER-
J
rn
I
~
1
-
~
+
~
J
I
4
I
nse
rt
the
batteries
int
o the remote
control
unit.
(See
page
8.)
mm
•
Speakers cannot be detac
hed
from the
TV.
•
The TV
angle
cannot be adjusted.
Experiencing HD
Images
An
HDTV without
an
HD source
is
just an ordinary TV.
To
enjoy
HD
images
on
the
TV, you
should
get
HD
programming
from
the
following:
• Over-the-air
br
oadc
ast
ing via
HD
quali
ty
antenna
•
HD
cable
/satellite
subsc
ript
i
on
•
HD
compatible external equi
pment
mm
• For i
nf
ormation on updating
to
HD programming, ask
your cable/satellite service provider.
@-7
Page 10
QUICK
REFERENCE
Installing
Batteries in the Remote
Control Unit
If
t
he
re
mote
control
fails
to
opera
te
1V
functions,
replace
the
batteries
in
the
remot
e
control
unit.
1
2
Ins
ert
two
"AAA"
size batteries
(
supp
lied
with
t
he
product).
• Place
the batteries with their
terminals
corresponding
to
the (
+)
and
(-)
indications in
the battery compartment.
3
Cl
ose
the
battery
cover
.
(itNIJj
Improper
use
of
batteries can
result
in
chemical leakage
or
explosion.
Be sure
to
follow
the
in
st
ru
ctions
below.
•
Do
not
mix batteries
of
different types. Different types
of batteries have different characteristics.
•
Do
not
mix old
and new batteries. Mixing
old
and
new
batteries can shorten the
life
of
new
batteries
or
cause
chemical leakage
in
old
batteries.
•
Remove batteries
as
soon as they are worn out.
Chemicals that leak
from
ba
tteries that come in contact
with
sk
in can cause a rash.
If
you find any
chemical
leakage,
wipe
thoroughly
with a
cloth.
•
The batteries
supplied
with this produ
ct
may have a
shorter
life
expectancy due
to
storage
co
nditions.
• If you
wi
ll
not
be
using the remote
control
unit f
or
an
extended period of time, remove batteries fr
om
it.
@-8
Using
the
Remote Control
Unit
Use
the
remote
contro
l
unit
by
pointing it t
ow
ards
the
remote
co
ntrol
se
n
so
r
on
the
lV
.
Ob
j
ects
between
the
remote
con
trol
unit
and
the
remote
contro
l
senso
r
may
prevent
proper
opera
tion.
•
Cautions regarding the remote
control
unit
•
Do not expose the remote
co
ntrol
unit to shock.
In
addition,
do
not expose the remote
control
unit to
li
quids,
and
do
not
place
it in
an
area with high humidity.
• Do not
install or
place
the remote
control
u
ni
t under
direct
sunlight. The heat may cause
de
formation
of
the
remote
co
ntr
ol
unit.
•
The remote
control
unit rnay not work
properly
if
the rem
ote
control
sensor on the
1V
is
under direct
sunlight or strong
li
ghting.
In
such cases, chan
ge
the
angle
of
the
lighting
or
th
e
lV,
or
operate the remote
control
unit
closer
to
the remote
control
sensor.
IMPORTANT:
IF
THE
UNIT
DOES
NOT
POWER
ON
-
UNPL
UG
THE
TELEVISION FROM
THE
OUTLET
AND
REPEAT
THE
INSTALLATION
S
TEP
S.
IF
YOU
ST
ILL
ENCOUNTER
NO POWER,
PL
EASE
CONTACT
US
AT
1-800
-
BE-SHARP
.
Preparation
Antennas
To
en
jo
y a clearer
pict
ure, use an
outdoor
ante
nna. The
fo
ll
ow
ing
is a brief
explanation
of
the types of
connect
io
ns
that
are
used for a
coaxial cable. If
your
outdoor
ante
n
na
uses a
75
-
oh
rn
coaxial cable
with an
F
-ty
pe
connecto
r,
pl
ug
it into t
he
antenna terminal
at
t
he
rear
of
the
1V
set. F
or
co
n
nec
ting the
an
tenna
ca
ble
to
the
1V,
use commercially available
cab
les.
Connecting Antenna
Cable
•
Connect
the
antenna cable
to
the
TV
using
one
of
the
methods
in
the
illustration
as
shown
(
G)
,
®.
@
or @
).
CD
Cable
without a
CATV
converter
®
VHF/UHF antenna
@
Combination VHF/
UHF antenna
@
Separate VHF/UHF
antenna
Home
An
te
nna
Cable
1V
l
ead
-
In
terminal
(75
-
ohm)
..,;;,;;;,;,;,.;..;.,;;;;;;;;;..;;.;...
___
[!j
~
==lF=o:::J
C
oax
ial cable
Home
An
ten
na
75
-
ohm
coaxi
al cable
(
roun
d)
te
r
min
al
(75-
oh
m)
~,;,;~;,;,;.;;,;;,;;;,;;.;;.;,;;;;;,;;..:;,;;,;;;;,;;;
..
[!j
~==lF=c:::~
Coax
i
al
c
ab
le
'175-ohm
coaxial cable
(ro
u
nd)
I
300-ohm twin
-l
ead
olr
300
/75-
oh
m
cable
(
fiat
)
adapte
r
~:::::::=====::::l
==•
UHF
ANTENN
A
V
HF
"to
300-ohm
AN
TENNA
l
twin-l
ead
ca
~
300-o
hm
twin
-l
ead cable
r
rom
b;
~!
:all·
To
1V
anten
na
~==========
t
emn
1nal
lor
75-ohm
coax
ia
l cable
1. A
75
-o
hm
system
is
genera
ll
y a round
cable
with F-t
ype
connector
t
hat
can
eas
i
ly
be
attached to a
te
rm
i
nal
witho
ut
tools.
1
F-type
conn
ect
or
---llllllll
llt}
75-ohm
coaxial
cab
le
(
rou
nd)
2.A
300-ohm
sys
t
em
is a
fl
at "tw
in
-l
ead"
c
able
that
can
be
attached
to
a
75
-ohm
terminal
throug
h a
300/75-ohm
adapter.
+i!.JIIQ+
F-type connector should
be
finger-tightened only.
When connecting the
RF
cable to the
1V
set,
do
not tighten
F-type
co
nnect
or
with
too
ls
.
If
too
ls
are used, it
may cause damage to your
1V
set.
(The
br
eaking of
internal
circuit, etc.)
300-
ohm
twin-l
ea
d c
able
(
flat
)
~
><
,b~
F-
type
connector
~
-
~
~\
75
-
ohm
coaxi
al
cab
le
Page 11
Part Names
TV
(Front)
-
?
I
0
--
OPC
sensor
'
Rem
ote
control
sen
sor
•
OPC:
Op
ti
cal Picture Control
(See
page
22
.)
TV
(Side)
POWER--II
ffil
bu
t
ton
I
I
~
I'
MENU-I
I
~
button
"
INPUT
--(
~~:~~e
l-~~
1>
buttons
~
(
CH/
V
Vl
+
Vo
l
ume
-~
l~
buttons
'
(VOL+/ - )
'
See
pages 11, 14,
20
and
25
for
but
ton operations.
~---Center
Icon
ill
um
ination
(
See
page
25.)
TV
(Rear)
~
~
c=a
o
~
·
------
--
-
----
-
-------------
---
---
--
-----
-
--
~
~
~
~
~1
@\~
ETHERNET
termi
na
l
DIGITAL AUDIO
OUT
termi
nal
AUDIO IN
t
er
m
in
al
(s
ha
r
ed
fo
r
PC
IN
a
nd
HDM
I IN
2)
'2
'1 See pages
11
to
13 and
39
for
external equipment connection.
*2
See page 42 for
details
on
the Audio
Se
lect
function.
*3
Skype
TM
is
available
for
th
e USB term
in
a
l.
For
details,
refer
to
the
following:
•
htt
p
://
www
.s
harpu
sa.corn
(
for
the
operation
ma
nual)
•
http
://
fr
ee
talk.me/
pr
o
du
ct/
sha
rp/ (for
inf
ormatio
n
on
the
c
om
munic
ation
camera
)
• ht
tp
:
//
www
.
skype
.
co
m (
for
details on
Sk
y
pe
)
RS
-232C
term
i
na
l
PC
IN
t
erm
in
al
'1
VIDEO IN 2
te
r
mina
ls
VIDEO IN
1
ter
mina
ls
- COMPONENT IN
term
i
na
ls
' 1
® -
9
Page 12
Part Names
Remote
Control
Unit
B)
•
When using
the
remote control unit, point it at the
lV.
®-
10
1
POWER:
Switch
the
lV
power on
or
enter
standby.
(See
page 14.)
2 TV,
STB, DVD•VCR, AUDIO:
Switches the
re
mot
e control for
1V,
STB,
BD, DVD, VCR
and
AUDIO
operation. (See
pa
ges 38
to
39
for
details.)
*To
enter
the
code
registration mode, you
need
to
press an appropriate button
(STB,
DVD•VCR
or
AUDIO)
and
DISPLAY
at the
same
time
.
3
External
equipment
operational
buttons:
Operate
the
external
equ
ipment.
4
OPTION:
Display the Link Operation Menu
screen. This button
will
function only when
AQUOS LINK
is used.
(See
pages
39
to
41
f
or
details.)
5
SLEEP:
Set
the sleep timer.
(See
page 17.)
6
0-9:
Set
the
channel.
(See
page 16.)
7 •
(DOT):
(See
pages
16
and 39.)
8
CC:
Display captions from a closed-caption
source.
(See
page 18.)
9
AV
MODE:
Select an audio or video setting.
(See
page
17.)
10
MUTE:
Mute the sound. (See page
16
.)
11
VOL+/-:
Set
the
volume.
(See
page 16.)
12
MENU:
Display
the
menu screen.
(See
page
20
.)
13
LE857U, LE757U, LE755U and LE657U
models
3D:
Select
between
3D
and 2D image viewing.
(See pages
31
to
32
for details.)
LE650U,
C7500U
and
C6500U models
AAL:
Display
the
AQUOS
ADVANTAGE
LIVE
sc
reen.
(See
page
4
5.
)
14
J;/'f
1
..,..;..,.
,
ENTER:
Select
a desired item
on
the
screen.
15
EXIT:
Turn
off
the menu screen.
16
FAVORITE
CH:
Set
the
favorite channels.
(See
page
26.)
17
A, B,
C,
D:
Select 4 pre
se
t favorite channels in
4 different categories.
(See
page 26.)
While watching,
you can toggle the selected
channels
by
pressing
A,
B,
C
and
D.
18
DISPLAY:
Display the channel informati
on
.
19
POWER (SOURCE):
Turns the power
of
th
e
external equipment on and off.
20
FREEZE:
Set
the
still
image. Press again to
return
to
no
rmal
sc
reen.
(See page 16.)
21
AUDIO:
Selects
t
he
MTS/SAP
or
the audio
mode
during multichannel audio broadcasts.
(See
page 17.)
22
ENT:
Jumps
to
a channel after selecting
wi
th
the
0-9
buttons.
23
FLASHBACK:
Return
to
the previous
cha
nnel
or
external i
np
ut
mode
.
(See
page 16.)
24
VIEW
MODE:
Sel
ec
t
the
screen size. (See pages
18
and
19.)
25
INPUT:
Select
a
1V
i
np
ut
source.
(TV,
H
DM
I1,
HDMI2,
HDM
I3, HDMI4, COMPONE
NT
, VIDE01,
VIDE02,
PC
IN,
Ho
me Network (DLNA),
U
SB
)
(See pages
11
and 16
.)
26
CH/\IV:
Select the channe
l.
(See
page
16
.)
27
SmartCentral:
Display the application w in
dow.
(See
page 16.)
28
RETURN:
Return
to
the
previous menu
sc
reen.
29
NETFLIX:
Display the Netflix screen.
(See page
17.)
30
FAY APP
1,
2, 3:
You
can assign your
fa
vo
rite
applications
to
these buttons.
(See
pages 45 to
47.)
Page 13
Introduction to Connections
Types
of
Connection
For
connecting
the
TV
to
external
equipment, use
commercially
available cables.
•
The illustrations of the terminals are for
explanation purposes and may vary slightly from the actual products.
•
Connecting
to
video
equipment
or
PC
Image quality
differs
depending
on
the
terminal used.
To
enjoy clearer images,
check
the
output
terminals
of
your
external
equipment
and
use its appropriate terminals
for
higher quality images.
Image Terminal
Cable
Terminal
on external
Quality
on
the
TV
equipment
HD
l
rn
!.1
HDMI-certified cable
EA
•Pages
Quality
12,13
Hom•
~
-=
0 3.5
mm
stereo minijack cable
=-
®
8
AUDIO
•
Pages
~.:.
ll
lmilii±l
l
12,13
DVI-HDMI
conversion cable
DV1
OUT
l
rn
!.j
Component video cable
v
PB PR
~-~~
®
®®
COMf'ONEHT
•
Page
12
Audio cable
R® ®L
PIIIICII)
PI~
y
AUDIO
Standard
AVcable
e
R®
®L
®
•
Page
12
Quality
AUDIO
VIDEO
•
Connecting
to
audio
equipment
Terminal
on
the
TV
Cable
Terminal
on
external
equipment
--
-
[OJ
~
--
Cl
Optical
fiber cable
G
--
OPTICAL
~~
DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT
•
Page
13
!iiiiiiL
'"""'OUT
1·
3~:1
03.5
mm
stereo
minijack to
RCA
audio cable
c:::i:
R®
®L
~
ANALOG
AUDIO IN
•
Page
13
Displaying
an
External
Equipment
Image
To view external source images,
select the input source by pressing
INPUT
on the remote control unit
or
on the 1V.
1:
~
~
A •
0
~
v
Ill
INPUT
+
~
~
I
'--
Example
MUTE
~
~
0
INPUT
OvoL
cHO
- v
1
Press
INPUT.
•
The INPUT
list screen displays.
2
Press
•/T
to
select
the
input
source
.
• You can also select the input source by pressing
INPUT.
Each time
INPUT
is
pressed, the input source toggles.
HDMI1
--+
HDMI2-
HDMI3
t
.1.
TV+-------------
HDM14
•
An
image from the selected source automatically displays.
• If
the corresponding input
is
not plugged
in
, you cannot
change the input. Be sure to connect the equipment
beforehand.
®-
11
Page 14
Connecting to External Equipment
You
can
connect
many
types
of
external
equipment
to
your
TV. To vi
ew
ex
ternal
source
i
mages,
se
l
ect
the
input
source
by
pressing
INPUT
on
the
remote
cont
rol
unit
or
on
the
TV. (
See
pages
11
and
16.
)
For connecting the
TV
to
external
equipment, use
commercially available cables.
•
To
protect
equipment,
always
turn
off
the
TV
before
co
nnecting any e
xt
ernal
equipment.
• Please
read the relevant
operation
manu
al
(Biu·ray disc
playe
r,
etc.)
ca
refully
be
fore making
connec
ti
ons
.
Connecting a
Blu-ray
Disc/DVD
Player
or
HD
Cable/Satellite
Set-top Box
•
When using an
HOM
I cable
(HDMIIN
1, 2, 3
or
4):
•
T
he
HDMI
(High D
ef
inition
Mu
ltimedia Interface)
te
rminal
is
an audio-vid
eo
interface
that
enab
l
es
a connection for
audio and video
signals
us
ing a
single
cab
le.
Th
e
HDMI
IN
terminal
supp
orts
high-resolution video input.
• Blu-ray disc
player •
DVD
player
•
HD
cable/satellite
set·top box
HDMI
-certi
fied
cable
I7Jm
•
To enjoy 1
080p
display
capa
bility,
connect your
external
equipment usi
ng
an HDMI-certified cable
or a
com
pone
nt
cable
and
set
th
e e
quipm
ent
to
1
080p
output.
•
Supported Audio format: Linear
PCM,
Dolby Digita
l, DTS, sampling
rate
32/44.1/48
kHz.
•
When you connect ARC-compatible equipment, use
HDMI IN
1.
•
When using a
DVI-HDMI conversion
cable (HOM I IN
2):
• Blu-ray disc
player •
DVD
player
•
HD
cable/satellite
set-top box
DVI-HDMI
conversi
on
ca
bl
e
•
When using a
DVI-HDMI
conversion
cable,
yo
u
sho
uld
make an
analog
au
dio
connection.
In
th
is case, in
add
iti
on
to
connecting a
DVI-HDMI
conversion
cable
to
the
HDMI
IN
2
terminal,
connect a
0
3.5
mm
st
ereo minijack
cab
le
to
the
AUDIO
IN
terminal
and
set
"Audio Select"
to
"
HDM
I+Analog". (See
page
42
.)
®-
12
• When using a Component cable
(COMPONENT
IN):
•
Bl
u-ray
disc player •
DVD
pl
ay
er
•
HD
cable/satellite
set-top box
Audio
cable
AUDIO-R
(
Re
d)
AUD
IO-L
(Whi
te)
Component video cable
•
To
enJOy
1080p
disp
lay
capab
il
i
ty
,
co
nnect your
external
equ
ipment
us
ing an
HDM
I-certi
fi
ed
cable
or
a component
cable
an
d set
th
e equipme
nt
to
1
080p
output.
Connecting a VCR, Game
Console,
Camcorder or
Cable/Satellite
Set-top Box
•
When using a Composite cable (VIDEO IN
1 or
2):
•
Ga
me
console
•
Ca
mcorder
VIDEO
(Yellow
)
AU
DIO-
L
(White
)
•
VCR
• Cable/Satellite
set-top box
A
Vc
ab
le
Page 15
Connecting
to
External
Equipment
Connecting a Surround System/ Audio System
•
When connecting an
AV amplifier
for a surround system
HD
Cable/Satellite
set-top box
H
DM
'
~"'oo""''
.,
[I ; '[I
' ·
.{
.....
,
..
_.~
.
..
:~
L----c
0
Opti
cal
fibe
r cab
le
'2
•
Le
tting the
1V
output the audio to an AV ampli
fi
er:
' 1
When y
ou
conn
ec
t ARC-compatible equipment, use the
HDMI
IN
1
termina
l.
'2
If
the equipme
nt
to be
co
nnected is not
compa
tible with the ARC, connect an
optical
fi
ber
cab
l
e.
•
If
the image is not in sync with the audi
o,
ch
ec
k the settings of
th
e
co
nnected surround system.
•
When connecting an audio
amplifier
It
is
poss
ible
to
o
utput
a
udi
o throu
gh
the
DIGITAL
AUD
IO
OUT
ter
mi
na
l.
(See
page
24 f
or
detai
ls
.)
!
I
'
Optical
fi
ber
cable
• S
ee
page
25
for
details
on the
Ou
tput
Select
function.
Connecting a PC
R
efer
to
page
43
fo
r a
list
of
PC
si
gna
ls
co
mp
at
ible w i
th
the
1V.
•
When using an
HDMI
cable (HDMI IN
1, 2, 3 or
4):
H
DM
I-certified
cable
•
Depend
in
g on the
boa
rd, only vi
deo
signals
ma
y
be
output.
In
this case,
1n
additi
on
to
connecting an
HDMI-certified
cable to the
H
OM
II
N 2 termi
na
l,
connect a
0
3.5
mm
stereo minij
ack
cable
to the
AUDIO IN
term
in
al and set "Audio
Select"
to
"HDMI+Analog
".
(See
page 4
2.)
•
T
he
HOM I
IN
terminals
only
support
digit
al
signal.
• When using a
DVI-HDMI
conversion
cable
(HDMIIN
2):
•
When
us
ing a
DVI-HDMI
con
version
cabl
e,
yo
u
should make an
anal
og
audio connection.
In
this cas
e,
in additi
on
to
con
necting a
DVI-HDMI
conversion
cab
le
to
the
H
OM
I IN
2
terminal,
connect a
0 3.5
mm
s
te
reo m
ini
jack
cable
to
the
AUDIO IN terminal and set
"Audio Select"
to
"
HD
MI+Analog". (See
page 42.
)
•
When using an
analog
RGB
cable
(PC
IN):
• When using
an
analog R
GB
cable,
input the audio
signal
to the
AUDIO
IN
terminal
of
PC
IN.
•
Whe
n
co
nnecting a
PC
to
the PC
IN, set
"Audio Select"
to
"Video+Audio
".
(See
page 42.)
®
-13
Page 16
Watching TV
Turning
On/Off
the Power
4·
POWER--
~
~
<
A •
E
~
v,
'
+
~
I
POWER
(On/Standby)
I---
POWER
~
DISPLAY
,
!llJ',g,
CJCJ
TV
STB
OVlH'CR
AUDIO
CJCJCJ
CJ
.,_
.,...
II
CJ
CJ
CJ
CJ
.....
•
Mol
eREC
CJ
CJCJ
CJ
OPTION
SLEEP
AUDIO
FREEZE
CJCJCJCJ
Press
POWER
on
the
TV
or
on
the
remote
control
unit
to
turn
the
power
on.
•
The
Initial
In
sta
ll
ation
starts when the TV powers on f
or
the first time.
If
the TV has been turned on before, the
Initial Installation will not be invoked. For changing the
settings
of
the
Initial Installation,
perform
"EZ setup"
on
the Initial Setup
menu on page 26.
Press
POWER
on
the
TV
or
on
the
remote
contro
l
unit
again
to
turn
the
power
off.
•
The
TV
enters
standby
and
the
image
on
the
sc
reen
disapp
ea
rs.
• If
you are not going
to
use this TV for a
long
period
of
time, be sure
to
remove the AC cord from the AC
outlet.
• Weak
electric
power is
sti
ll
consumed even when the
TV is turned o
ff.
@-14
Initial Installation
When
you
turn
on
the
TV
for
the
first
time
, it
will
automatically memorize
the
broadcasting
channels
available in
the
region
where
you
live. Perform
the
following
steps
be
fo
re
you
press
POWER
on
the
remote
cont
r
ol
unit.
1.
Insert
the
batteries into the
remo
te
control unit.
(See
page
8.)
2.
Connect
the
antenna
cable
to
the
TV.
(See
page
8.)
3.
Plug in
the
AC
cor
d
to
the
AC
outlet. (See
page
7.)
MU
TE
~ ~
0
I
NPUT
O
va
L
CH
m
- v
Language
(language
setting)
Select
from
amo
ng 3
languages: Engl
is
h,
French
and
Spanish.
1
Press
J;/T
to
select
the
desir
ed
language listed
on
the
screen, and
then
press
ENTER.
Location
&
Time
Make
settings
for
the
country
,
area
and
ti
me
zone
where
you
use
the
TV.
2
Press
J;/T
to
select "United States", "Canada"
or
"Mexico", and then
press
ENTER.
3
Press
JJ./T
to
sel
ect
the t
ime
zone
where you
are using
the
TV,
and
th
en
press
ENTER.
•
The time zone differs depending on the
selected
country.
•
The fac
to
ry preset
value
is the time zone for the
capital
of
the
selected
country.
4
Press
JJ.
/T
to
select
the
Da
ylight
Savings
Ti
me,
and then press
ENTER.
• "Auto"
is the
def
au
lt selection.
TV
Location
Se
l
ec
t
"H
ome"
or
'Store"
f
or
the
loca
tion
wher
e
you
plan
to
install
the
TV.
This
prod
uct
qualifies
for
ENERGY
STAR
in
Home
m
ode
default
setting.
5
Press
<1111
/
~
to
select "Home"
or
"Store".
Pre
ss
ENTER
to
enter t
he
sett
i
ng
.
Home:
"Power Saving"
is set
to
"Advanced", and
AV
MODE
is set
to
"STANDARD
(ENERGY
STAR)".
Store:
"Power Saving"
is
set to
"Off"
and
AV MO
DE
is set
to
"DYNAMIC (
Fi
xed)". Picture
Reset and
Feature Demo can
be
set.
Picture
Reset
AV MODE will
be set to
"DYNAMIC (Rxed
)"
regardless
of
whether
Picture
Reset
is
"On"
or
"Off".
• If
you select "On"
and there is no operation
for
30
minutes:
-
AV
MODE
will
be reset to
"DYNAMIC (
Fi
xed)"
.
- When a 3D
signal
is detected, 3D images
will
switch
to
2D images. (For the LE857
U,
LE757U, LE755U and LE657U
models)
•
When
"Off"
is selected:
-
AV
MODE wi
ll
be set
to
"DYNAMIC
(Fixed
)".
Feature Demo:
When
"On"
is
selected,
after
all
the settings are
completed, the Featu
re
Dem
o
screen is
displayed
if the
re
is
no operat i
on
for
several
minutes.
Lm
•
ENERGY
STAR
qua
li
fication is based on
AV
MODE
"STAND
ARD
(E
NE
RG
Y
STAR)
".
Antenna
&
Cable/STB
Select
the
ty
pe
of
connection you
wi
ll
use to
wa
tch
TV.
6
Press
<IIII
I
~
to
se
l
ec
t
"A
nt
enna
&
Ca
ble
"
or
"Set-
top
box",
a
nd
then pr
ess
ENTER.
To watch TV via an antenna or
cable
connection
(without using a set-top box):
Select
"Antenna
&
Cable",
and then go to st
ep
7.
To watch TV
via
a set-top
box:
(!)S
el
ec
t "Set-top
box", and then press
ENTER.
®Please
make sure your se
t-t
op box is tu
md
on,
and then press
ENTER.
@ To
watch TV,
select
the input source
corresponding to the terminal
co
nne
cted to the
se
t-
top box. When
do
ing so, you must make the
setti
ng
to
skip
"TV". Press
<1111
/.,.
to
se
lect "On",
and
th
en press
ENTER.
•
When this is set to "On",
the
channel
on the
TV
cannot be changed using the remote c
on
trol
u
nit
or
menu.
(e.g
. CH
/\IV
.
Favori
te CH,
etc
.)
• See
page 24 for de
ta
ils
on the
Input Skip
function.
@Press
INPUT
to
select
the input source
corresponding to the
term
in
al
connected
to
th
e
set-top
bo
x.
Ma
ke the necessary
se
ttin
gs
on the
connected external equipment.
• See
the operation
manual
of
the connected
equipment for setting up the equipment.
Air/Cable (Antenna setting)
Mak
e sure
what
kind of
co
nne
ct
ion is
ma
de wi
th
yo
ur
TV
when
selecting "Air"
or
"Cable".
7
Press
<IIII
I.,.
to
se
lect
"Air" or "Cable".
Press
ENTER
to enter the setting.
Page 17
Watching TV
CH
Search
(Channel search)
Channel
auto
search makes
the
1V
look
for
all
channels viewable
in
the
set area.
8
When
"Air" is
selected
in
Antenna
setting:
Press
~~~
to
select "Start", and then press
ENTER.
When
"Cable"
is
selected
in Antenna setting:
G)
Press
Jt.
/
"Y
to
select "Analog
&
Digital Search
Start" to search both
analog
and
digital
broadcasts, or
to
select "Analog Search Start"
to
search only analog
broadcasts, and then press
ENTER.
Cancel
•
The
Channel
search
will start
automatically.
•
To exit the
Channel
search screen,
select
"Cancel",
and then press
ENTER.
@The
Channel
search
results
may
include
scrambled channels
or
channels
that are not
viewable
in
the set
area.
Press
~
~
~
to
select
"Yes",
and then press
ENTER
to
remove
scrambled channels.
Network
When you connect
to
the
Internet
on
the
1V,
select
the
desired connection m
ethod
and
follow
the
instructions
shown
on
th
e
display.
• Wireless
LAN connection is
possible
only
when
the
WPS
(push button)
method
is used.
If
any
other
method
is
used,
ma
ke
settings
by
Initial
Setup
>
Internet
Setup
>
Network
Setup. (See pages
44
to
45.)
9
Press
<01111
/
~
to
select "Yes",
and
the
n press
ENTER.
10
Press
11../T
to
sel
ect
"Wired"
or
"Wireless",
and
then press
ENTER.
Connection using an ETHERNET
cable:
G)
Select "Wired"
and press
ENTER.
@Confirm that the
1V
is
properly
connected
with the router, and then p
ress
"Next". Follow
the instructions on
th
e
display
to
perform
th
e
connection test.
Wireless LAN connection by the
WPS
method:
G)
Select "Wireless" and press
ENTER.
@Follow
the instructions on the
displ
ay,
and
fina
li
ze
the connecti
on
after testing its
viab
il
ity.
•
When you change the network settings, refer to
Initi
al
Setup
>
Internet Setup
>
Network Setup.
(See
pages
44
to
45.)
Completed
11
The
settings confinmation screen is
displayed.
Confirm
the
infonmation
di
sp
la
yed
on
the
screen,
and
then press
ENTER
.
Examples
of
the settings confirmation screen
When one
or
more
channel
is received after
"Antenna
&
Cable"
was
selected
in step
6
and a
search was carried out.
Language :
Enghsn
Location
&
Time
United States/EST/Auto
TV
Location
:
Home
An
tenna
&
Cable
/STB
: Antenna
&
Cable
Ale/C
able
:
Aic
Search
Res
u
~
: Digital 4ch
Analog 7ch
Net work
Co
nn
ect
i
On
:
No
t
comp
leted
Pces
s
the
INPUT
bu
tt
on.
then the r
ight
arrow
• •
to see t
he
li
st
of
chann
els
fo
un
d.
When
no
channel
is received after "Antenna
&
Cable"
was
selected
in
step
6
and a search was
carried out.
ED
Language
Lo
c
ation
&
Ti
me
TV
Locat
ion
Antenna
&
Cabl
e!
STB
Air/C
ab
le
Search
Resu
~
Netw
ork
Conn
ection
:E
nglish
:
Un
ite
d States/EST/Auto
:H
o
me
:
An
tenna
&
Ca
ble
:Cab
le
:N
o chann
el
.
Not compleled
Channel
no
t tound.
Antenn
a/
Cable are n
ot
properly connected
or Air/
Cabl
e
se
tup
is
Inco
rr
ect.
Please check
yo
ur Antenna/Cable
con
nection
and Air/
Cabl
e setup.
• If no
channel
is found, confirm the type
of
connection
made with your
1V
and try
"EZ Setup"
again.
(See
page 26.)
•
To
see
the
list
of
channels
found during
Channel
search, press
INPUT,
and then press
~
.
When
"Set-top
box
"
was
selected
in step 6.
• Click "OK"
to
di
sp
lay
the confirmation screen for
input source switchi
ng
.
Plea
se
make sure
to
select
IN
PUT
to the
speci
f
ic
input termi
na
l you
are
connect
i
ng
your
set-top box to get
th
e pi
cture
.
Cl
os
ed cap
tion
.
s
u
b~chan
n
el
au
dio
and channel selection need
to
be
selected
with
you
r
s
et
~
top
bm<.
If
you sele
ct
'Show
the
I
np
ut List ".
the
connect1
on
st
atus
of
in
put
source
will
be s
hown
.
Ple
as
e
make sure the 1nput
pos
itiOn
wh
1ch
you
r
set-top
box.
is
connecte
d.
OK
Show
the input
list:
You can check t
he
current
connection status of external
eq
ui
pment. Co
nfi
rm
which input
terminal
is
co
nnected
to
the
se
t-t
op
box.
OK:
C
li
cking "OK" w
ill
c
omp
lete
the
EZ
Se
tup
procedure.
•
This may not
display correctly
depending on
th
e
connected equipment.
•
This
is
not
displayed
correctly
when the connected
equipment is off.
•
To watch
1V
using a set-t
op
box,
pr
ess INPUT
after
completing
the
initial settings
, and
select
the
input to which the se
t-top
box
is
connected.
•
For changing the settings
of
the
Initial Installation,
perfonm
"EZ
setup"
on the
Initial Setup
menu on page
26.
@)-
15
Page 18
Direct Button Operation
POWE
R
B
DISPLAY
,Wuf,'/;~,
CJCI
TV
S
TB
OVO
•
VCR
AUDI
O
CJ
CJ
CJCJ
.....,..
•
..,..
eREC
CJ
CJ
CJ
CJ
OP
TI
ON
SL
E
EP
AU
DIO
FR
EEZ
E
CJOCJD
l:
mattrt~ooa
l-
J
F
AVOR
I
TE
r=
F~P
~
@)~
A B
C
D
0000
®-16
You
can
change
cha
nnels in several ways.
Method
1
Using
CH/\.IV
on
th
e rem ote
con
trol unit or
on
the
TV.
Method
2
Us
i
ng
r
emo
te
con
trol
butt
ons
0-9
, •
(DOT).
Examples:
To
select
a 1 or 2-digit channel number
(e.
g.,
ChannelS):
Pre
ss
5
------;;.
ENT.
To
select
a
3-d
igit channel number (e. g., Channel
115):
Press
1
------;;.
1
------;;.
5
------;;.
ENT
.
To
select a
4-d
igit channel number (e. g., Channel
22.1):
Press
2
------;;.
2
------;;.
•
(DOT)
--7
1
--)
ENT
.
Method
3
Sel
ec
ting
the
progra
m fr
om
th
e Channel list.
1
P
ress
INPUT
on
th
e remote
co
nt
rol unit.
•
The
INP
LJT
list
displays.
2
Pre
ss
<1111
/
~
to
sel
ec
t
"AIR"
or
"CABLE".
•
The Channel
list
displays.
3
Pr
ess
JJ;
/ T
to
se
l
ect
t
he
des
ired channel, and
then
pres
s
ENTER.
• When
se
lecting a 1-digit channel number, it is not
necessary
to
press
0
before the number.
• When you enter
0-9
onl
y,
channel select
io
n
w
ill
be
made if there is no operation within a few seconds.
• If
you pu
sh
"0"
by itsel
f,
nothing
will happen.
•
Comp
lete the above steps within a few seconds.
•
When
yo
u enter
0-9
and
•
(DOT)
,
channel selection
will
be
ma
de if t
he
re is no operation with
in
a few seconds.
You
can ch
ange
the
vo
lume
by
pressing
VOL+/-
on
th
e
TV
or on
the
remote
co
n
tro
l
un
it.
•
To increase the volum
e,
press
VOL+.
•
To
decrease the volum
e,
press
VOL-.
Audio
status
Output
devic
e
OutputSe~
I ·
Fixed
T
Variable
Speaker
Variable sound
1
Mute
•
When
"
Output
Se
le
ct
"
is
set
to
"Va
riable",
the indicator
on the screen changes as shown
be
low.
• See
page
25
for deta
il
s on
th
e
Output
Se
lect
function.
Mu
t
es
the
current
sound
output.
Press
MUTE.
•
"C@I
"
wi
ll
be displayed on the screen for
30
minutes,
and the sound is silenced.
•
Within
30
minutes of pressing
MUTE,
mute can be
ca
n
ce
led by pressing
VOL+
1-
or
MUTE.
•
Mute
wi
ll
be canceled after
30
minutes have passed .
However, the TV
will not suddenly output a l
oud
sound
as the volu
me
level
is set to
0 automatically.
Al
lows
yo
u to
capt
ure and freeze a
mov
i
ng
image
th
at
you
are
wa
tching.
Pr
ess
FREEZE.
•
A moving image is captur
ed.
•
Press
FREEZE
again
to
cancel the function.
•
When this function is not
avai
lable, "No
display
in
g sti
ll
image
av
ai
labl
e.
" will displa
y.
•
The
still
image automatically goes o
ut
after
30
minutes.
• If
you are using the freeze function and a broadcast
activates th
e
V-CHIP BLOCK, the freeze function
will be canceled and a
V-CHIP BLOCK
message
w
ill
appear.
• You
can have the same settings by choosing
"Freeze"
on the menu items.
(See
page 24.)
To
view
ex
ternal
so
u
rce
images, sel
ec
t
the
i
npu
t
source
by
press
i
ng
INPUT
on
t
he
r
emote
con
tro
l
un
it
or
on
the
TV
.
1
Press
INPUT.
•
The
INPUT list
sc
reen displays.
2
Press
JJ;
/ T
or press
INPUT
aga
in to
se
l
ect
t
he
i
npu
t
so
ur
ce.
•
An image from the
se
lected source automatically
displays.
•
Ea
ch time
INPUT
is pressed, the input source
toggles.
• If
the corresponding input is not plugged in, you
cannot ch
ange the input. Be sure
to
connect the
equipment beforehand.
• See
pages 11
to
13 and 39 for external equipment
connection.
Press
FLASHBACK
to
swi
t
ch
to
th
e previously
tu
ned
channel
or
previous
input
mode
.
•
Press
FLASHBACK
again
to
switch back to the
currently tuned
channe
l.
1m)
•
FLASHBACK
will
not work if no
channel has been
changed after the TV is tu
rn
ed
on.
Allows
you
to
dire
ct
ly
ac
tivate
va
rio
us
types
of
app
lications.
1
Press
SmartCentra
l
to
disp
l
ay
the
app
li
cat
ion
wi
ndow
.
•
Press
SmartCent
ral
again to displ
ay
a
list
of
app
lications by
ca
tegory.
2
Pr
ess
<1111
/
~
(
or
• / T )
to
select
the
desir
ed
ap
plication,
and
the
n p
ress
ENTER.
• If
you changed the display to the
li
st
of
app
lications
in
step 1 , select a category and th
en
an application.
See
page 47 for deta
il
s.
• If
"
~
"
is displayed after you swi
tc
h to
USB
mo
de,
check the
USB
co
nnection.
•
If"~
"
or
"~
0
"
is displayed after you
sw
itch to
Horne Network (DL
NA)
mode
or
after you
co
nnect
to
the
Internet,
check your
TV
's
network settings
and connection.
mm
• See pages 34, 45 to 47 for details of viewable
app
li
cations.
• You
can displ
ay
the appli
ca
tion window by choosing
"APPS"
on the menu items.
(See
page 24
.)
•
When this function is not
available, "Can
no
t
ope
rate
this function
now" wi
ll
display.
Page 19
Direct Button Operation
Displays
the
Netflix screen.
Press
NETFLIX.
ID
•
To enjoy Netfli
x,
you need
to
make:
-a
broadband
Internet connection
(See
page 44.)
-settings
of
Internet Setup
(See
pages 44
to
45.)
-adju
stments for Netflix
(See
page 47.)
•
MTS/SAP
stereo
mode
The
TV
has
a feature
that
allows
rece
ption
of
sound
other
than
the
main
audio
for
the
program.
This
feature is called Multi
-c
hannel Television
Sound
(MTS).
The
TV
with MTS
can
receive
mono
sound,
stereo
sound
and
Secondary
Audio
Programs
(SA
P).
The
SAP
feature
allows
a
TV
station
to
broadcast
other
information,
which
could
be
audio
in another
la
ngu
a
ge
or
somet
hing
completely
different
like
weather information.
You
can
enjoy Hi-Fi
stereo
sound
or
SAP
broadcasts
where
available.
• Stereo
broadcasts:
View programs like live
sporting
events, shows and concerts in dynamic stereo sound.
•
SAP
broadcasts:
Re
ce
ive
TV broadcasts
in
either
MAIN
or
SAP
sound.
MAIN
sound: The norm
al
program soundtrack
(e
ither
in
mono or stereo).
SAP
sound:
Li
st
en
to a second language,
supplementary commentary
or
other information.
(SAP
is mono sound.)
If
stereo sound is difficult
to
hear.
• Obtain
a clearer sound by manually switching
to
fi
xed
mono-sound mode.
You
ca
n
change
MTS
as
sho
wn
be
l
ow
to
match
the
television
bro
adcas
t signa
l.
Press
AUDIO
to
toggle
between
audio
modes.
Examples:
when
receiving
MTS
and
SAP
STEREO mode:
STEREO-
MONO
STEREO
+S
AP
mode:
ST(SAP)-
SAP(ST)-
MONO
MAIN+
SAP
mode:
MAIN-SAP
MONO
mode:
MONO
• Digital
broadcasting
audio
mode
The
types
of
audio
transmitted
in a
digital broad
cast
include
SURROUND
as
well
as
MONO
and
STEREO.
In
addition, it is
possib
le
for
multiple au
dio
tracks
to
accompany
a single
vi
deo
track.
Press
ENTER
to
togg
le
between
aud
io
modes.
Example:
when
receiving Digital
broadcasting
STEREO
(Audio1)
•
STEREO
(Audio2)
t..-
SURROUND
(Audio
3)
......
ma
•
MTS
on
ly
operates
while
in TV mode.
•
You
can have the same sett
in
gs
by choosing
"Change
Audio"
on the menu items.
(See
page 24.)
Allows
you
to
set a
time
when
the
TV
auto
matically
switches
to
standb
y.
Press
SLEEP
.
•
The remaining time displays when the
sleep
timer has
been set.
•
Each time you press
SLEEP,
the remaining t
ime
switches as shown belo
w.
011•30•60•90-120
•
When set, the time automatically starts counting down.
• If
you want to adju
st
the sleep timer, you can press
SLEEP
twice then change the tim e setting.
•
When it
is
5 minutes before the time expir
es,
t
he
remaining time wi
ll
start to keep appearing every minute.
l:D
•
Se
lect
"Off
"
by pressing
SLEEP
to cancel the sl
eep
time
r.
•
The TV will enter
standby when the remaining time
reaches
0.
AV
MODE
gi
ve
s
you
severa
l
viewing
op
tions
to
c
hoose
from
to
best
matc
h
th
e surrounding
en
vi
ronment
of
th
e
TV
,
wh
ich
can vary d
ue
to
facto
rs
like
room
brightness, t
ype
of
pr
ogr
am
wat
c
hed
or
the
type
of
de
vi
ce
co
nne
cted.
Yo
u
can use
US
ER
Mode
to
create
cus
tom
ized
sett
i
ngs
for
each
TV
inpu
t. These
sett
i
ngs
will
be
aut
om
at
ically
save
d
on
each
input
fo
r
conve
nience.
Pre
ss
AV
MODE.
Current
AV
MODE
displays.
• Press
AV
MODE
again before the mode displayed
on
the scr
een
disappears. The mode changes as shown
below:
• Example:
When using the
COMPONENT IN,
VIDEO
IN
1
or
2
terminals
• LE857U, LE757U, LE755U and
C7500U models
AUTO
-STANDARD
(ENERGY
ST
AR
)-
MOVIE
t
'
DYNAM
IC
(
Fi
xe
d)
VINTAGE
MOVIE
t
'
DYNAMIC-
USER
[TV]
-
GAME
(S
tandard)
•
LE657U,
LE650U
and
C6500U
models
AUTO-
STANDARD
(
ENERGY
S
TA
R)
-
MOVIE
t '
DYNA
M
IC
(Fix
ed)
-
DYNAMI
C
-
USER
[TV]
-
GAME
• Example:
When using
the
PC
IN
or
HDMIIN
1 to 4
terminals
•
LE857U, LE757U,
LE755U
and
C7500U
models
AU
TO
-
STANDARD
(E
N
ERGY
STAR)
-MOV
IE
t '
DYNA
M
IC
(Fix
ed)
VIN
TAGE
MOVIE
t '
DYNAMIC
GAME
(
Standa
rd)
t '
x.
v.
Co
l
or
"
USER
[
-"
)
PC
""x.v.Color"
can
only
be
selected when an x.v.Color
signal is input using
H
OM
\
IN
1 to 4 terminals.
• LE657U,
LE650U
and
C6500U
models
AU
TO
-
STANDARD
(E
NERGY
STAR)
-
MOVIE
t
'
DY
NAMIC
(
Fi
xe
d)
G
AME
t
'
D
YNAM
IC USER[-") PC
AUTO:
Optimizes the image quality automatica
ll
y
based on the room brig
ht
ness and image signa
l.
STANDARD (ENERGY STAR):
For a highly defined
image in a normal lighting.
MOVIE:
F
or
a movie.
VINTAGE MOVIE:
Allo
ws
you
to
enjoy old-time films
in
a good old-fashioned way, where the images
l
ook
as if they were projected in
real
time in those
days.
(For the LE857
U,
LE757U, LE755U and
C7500U
models)
GAME (Standard/High Motion):
Su
itable
f
or
ga
me
playing. You
can con
fi
gure the settings according
to the type
of
the game. Refer to "Picture Settin
g"
>"Advanced">
"Game Type
".
(For the LE
85
7U,
LE
757U, LE755U and C75
00
U
models)
(See
page 22.)
GAME:
Lowers image brightness for easier vi
ew
ing.
(F
or
the
LE
657U,
LE
65
0U and
C6500U
m
ode
ls)
PC:
F
or
PC.
USER:
Allows the u
se
r to cust
omize
settings
as
des
ir
ed.
You
can
set the mode for
each
input source.
x.v.Color:
Supports
the x.v.Color international
st
andard for wi
de
color space.
Th
e x.v.Color
signal allows you
to
expe
ri
ence colors that
conventional color signals cannot reproduce.
(For the LE857U, LE757
U,
LE755U and
C7500U
model
s)
DYNAMIC:
F
or
a
clear-cut
image emphasizing high
contrast, useful for spo
rt
s viewing.
DYNAMIC
(Fixed):
Changes the image and
sound settings to the factory preset
val
ues.
No
adjustments are allowed.
ID
• You
c
an
select a different
AV MODE
it
em for each
in
put mode. (For example, select
STANDARD
(ENERGY
STAR) for TV input and
DYNAMIC
for
COMPONEN
T.)
•
When you
play games, "GAME"
is recommended for
AVMO
DE.
• You
cannot set
"GAME"
or
"PC"
when the
TV
is
connected
to
the
In
te
rn
et
or
wh
en the input source is
"Home
Network
(DLNA)"
or
'USB".
• You
can have the same settin
gs
by
choosing
"AV
MOD
E"
on the menu items. (See
page 22.)
®
-17
Page 20
Direct Button Operation
E~lU·
Amll·!it
,ilil·I:S
6®
®
mml
Your
1V
is
equipped
with
an
internal Closed
Caption
decoder.
It allows
you
to
view
conversations,
narration
and
sound
effects
as
subtitles
on
your
1V.
Closed
Captions are available
on
some
1V
programs
and
on
some
VHS
horne
video
tapes
at
the
discretion
of
the
program
provider.
Digital
Closed
Caption
service is a
new
caption
service available
only
on
digitai1V
programs
(also
at
the
discretion
of
the
service provider).
It
is a
more
flexible
system
than
the
original
Closed
Caption
system,
because
it
allows
for a variety
of
caption
sizes
and
font styles.
When
the
Digital
Closed
Caption service is in use, it
will
be
indicated
by
the
appearance
of
a
3-letter
abbreviation
that
also indicates
the
language
of
the
Digital
Closed
Captions: ENG (English),
SPA
(Spanish),
FRA (French)
or
other
language
codes.
Not
all
programs
and
VHS
videotapes offer
closed
captions
.
Please
look
for
the
"~"
symbol
to
ensure
that
captions
will
be
shown.
In
the
Closed
Caption
system, there
can
be
more
than
one
caption service provided. Each is
ident
ified
by
its
own
number.
The
"CC1"
and
"CC2"
services
display subtitles
of
1V
programs
superimposed
over
the
program's
picture.
In
the
Closed
Caption
system,
the
"Text1"
or
"Text2"
services display
text
that
is unrelated
to
the
prograrn
being viewed (e.g.,
weather
or
news). These services
are
also
superimposed
over
the
program
currently
being viewed.
1
Press
CC.
•
This
will
present the Closed Caption information
display.
2
Press
CC
while
the
Closed
Caption
informat
ion
is
still
on
the
screen
.
• Press
repeatedly until you select the desired
closed caption service.
DIGITAL
AUdio
V1deo
cc
Rat1ngs
®-
18
22.1
STEREO
480p
(4
:
3)
1/2C
C1
=====
NONE
Clo
sed
Caption
i
nform
a
ti
on
•
Depending on
the number
of
caption services
in
the
signal being received, you
will
see
in
formation such as
1/2
or
1/4 displayed.
1/2 means "the
first
of
two
services
".
Example:
If a program has th
ree
services (Digital CC(
ENG),
CC1
and Text1), the closed caption display
wi
ll
togg
le in
this
sequence:
-------
•
The
CC
button keeps a record
of
the last service
selected in its memory.
If
the last closed caption mode
(e
.g. 1/3
ENG
) you
selected is not available for the next program, or on
another channel, the closed caption service that
is
available is automatically selected, and this service
appears in
pa
rentheses, e.g.
"1
/3(C
C1
)".
Closed Capti
on
services that appear in parentheses
will
not be stored in the
CC
button
's
memory as your last
selected service.
Only
services that you have selected
with the
CC
button
are
stored.
Examples:
In
a
case
where
there
are
two
closed
caption
services
pro
vi
ded
(
for
instance, Digital
CC
(ENG)
a
nd
CC1
),
and
Digital CC(ENG) is di
spla
yed as
your
current selection, if Digital CC(ENG) is n
ot
broadcast
for
the
next
program
,
the
other
closed
cap
tion
service,
CC1,
wi
ll
be
displayed
in parentheses.
A
closed
caption
service
appears
in parentheses
because
the
service
you
selected
is
not
available
and
a different service is displayed
on
yo
ur
screen.
"1
/1(CC1)" is
disp
layed
instead
of
"1
/2/
ENG".
mm
•
When
"Power Sav
in
g"
is set to
"Standard"
or
"Advanced",
the
Power Saving leaf icon appears on
the channel information window.
See
pa
ge 24 for
details of
Power Saving
settings.
• See
page 25 for
de
tailed closed caption settings.
•
When the pr
og
ram contains no closed caption,
"--"
displays in the closed caption information.
•
If
the language code, e.g.
"ENG",
is not found on
Di
gitai1V programs,"--" will be shown.
• Four kinds
of
closed caption service
(CC
1, CC2, Text1,
Text2) are potentially available, but a broadcast may
contain none
or
on
ly
some
of
these services at the
discretion
of
the program provider.
•
When a web page is displayed, Closed Captions are
not availab
le.
• You can have the same settings by choos
in
g
"Change
CC"
on the menu items.
(See
page 24
.)
Yo
u
can sel
ect
the
sc
reen size.
1
Pre
ss
VIEW
MODE
.
•
The
View
Mode menu displays.
•
The menu lists the
View
Mode options
se
lectable for the ty
pe
of
video signal currently be
in
g recei
ved
.
2
Press
VIEW MODE
or
JJ.
.I'
Y
while
the
View
Mode
me
nu
is di
spla
yed to sel
ec
t a desired item on
the
menu.
• You can sequentially select a
Vi
ew
Mode that has its
ow
n aspect
ra
ti
o.
• You
ca
n have the same sett
in
gs
by choosing "View Mode"
on the menu item
s.
(See
page 24.)
•
Each
time you press
VIEW MODE
when a browser screen is shown, the display pa
tt
e
rn
togg
le
s between a website-
only screen and a
1V
+Web screen.
• You
may not be able
to
change the
View
Mode while in 3D
mo
de
. (For t
he
LE
857U, LE757U,
LE
755U and LE657U
models)
•
For
HD
programs
Stretch Dot
by
Dot
(Full
Screen)
S.Stretch
(Smart stretch) Zoom
[:B
~
D
[Jd
Suitable for viewing wide-
Dot
by
Dot
(1080i/
S
ui
tab
le for stretching 4:3
Su
itab
le
f
or
viewing wide-
scr
ee
n
1.
78:1 aspect ratio
p only):
Detects the
pro
grams
to
fi
ll the screen. scr
ee
n 2.3
5:
1 aspect-ratio
program, stretch mode resolution of the signal and programs in
ful
l s
cr
een.
wi
ll
sti
ll
show very thin displays an image wi
th
the
black bands at the
to
p and
same number of pixels on
bottom of the screen.
the
sc
reen.
Full
Screen
(720p
only):
You
can select
"Fu
ll
Screen"
on
ly
when
re
ceiving a 720p signa
l.
•
Wh
en
using Dot
by
Dot or
Fu
ll
Screen,
it is possible
to
see
no
ise
or
ba
rs around different
ou
ter po
rt
ions of the
screen.
Please
change view m
od
e to correct thi
s.
•
For
4:3
programs
Example:
Screen
size
images
Side
Bar
S.Stretch
(Smart stretch)
Zoom Stretch
[Q]
bQd
caJ
1:o:
1
Suitable for viewing Suitable for stretching 4:3
Suitable for viewing wide- This mode is useful for
convention
al4:3
programs programs to
fill
the screen.
screen 2.35:1 anamorphic 1. 78: 1
DVDs
.
When
in their normal forma
t.
DVDs
in
full
screen. viewing 1.85:1
DVDs,
stretch mode
wi
ll
sti
ll
sh
ow
very thin black bands at
the t
op
and bottom of the
scree
n.
Page 21
Direct Button Operation
•
For
USB-
Video,
DLNA-Video
or
Internet applications
Example:
Screen
size
images
Input
signal
Auto Original
Stretch
[]•
[0]
a
[OJ
Keeps the
original Di
sp
lays
an image An image
fu
ll
y fills
aspect ratio in a
by
an
original
size.
the
screen.
full
screen
display.
•For
PC
Example:
Screen
size
images
Input
signal
Normal
Zoom
Stretch
Dot
by
Dot
[]
4:3
[Q]
[]]
[OJ
IQI
Keeps the
original
For vi
ew
ing
An
image
fully
fill
s
Detec
ts
the
•
aspect ratio
in
a widescreen
the
screen. resolution
of
full
screen
display.
programs. The
the signal and
top
and bottom
displays
an image
of
the image is with the same
cropped. number
of
pixels
on the screen.
Input
signal
Stretch
Dot
by
Dot
[OJ
16:9 •
[OJ
[Q]
An image
fully fills
Detects the
the screen. resolution
of
the
signal
and
displays
an
image
with the same
number
of
pixels
on
the screen.
•
Connect
th
e
PC
before making adjustments.
(See
page
13
.)
• Selectable
sc
reen size
may
vary with
in
put
signal
type.
® -
19
Page 22
On-Screen Display Menu
~
LCFONT
embedded
CD
Guide
display
• This indicates the buttons that can be operated
on
the
displayed
screen. The guide
display
varies depending on
the menu setting screen.
•
The operations for some
selected
items may be
displayed
in
the
operational
guide bar at the bottom of the
screen.
@
Item displayed
in
blue
• This indicates the item
currently selected.
•
Press
ENTER
to go to the adjustment screen for this item.
@ Item
in
brackets
• This indicates the current setting for the item.
@
Item displayed in white
• This indicates that the item can be
selected.
@
Item displayed in gray
•
This indicates that the item cannot be
selected.
There
are
various reasons why the items cannot be selected,
but the main reasons
are
as
follows:
-
Nothing
is
connected to the
selected
input terminal.
-
The
function
is
not compatible with the current input
signal.
•
About Menu Items
•
When
AV
MODE
is
set to
"AUTO",
part of the menu may not be displayed correctly
or the setting range of the menu
may be changed.
• Some
menu items may not be
displayed
depending on the
selected
input source.
•
The screens
in
the operation
manual
are
for explanation
purposes (some
are
enlarged,
others cropped) and may
vary
slightly
from the
actual
screens.
•
The order of
explanations
for each menu item
in
the
following
pages
is
not
necessarily
in
accordance with the
alignment
of the items on the screen.
~LCFONT:
•
This product
is
embedded with
LC
Font
technology,
which was
developed
by SHARP Corporation for
clearly
displaying
easy-to-read characters on
LCD
screens.
®-
20
On-Screen
Display
Menu Operation
Example
1
Press
MENU
to
display
the MENU screen.
2
CD
Press
~~
.....
to
select
the desired menu.
@
Press
£../T
to
select a specific adjustment item, and then press
ENTER.
• Additional related
adjustment
items may be
displayed.
Press
&IT
to select the desired item.
@Adjust
the item
while referring
to
the
guide
display.
•
Operations vary depending
on
the function or item. Refer to the guide
display
corresponding to the menu
setting screen for button operations.
3
Press
MENU
to
exit.
lSD
•
Menu options differ
in
the
selected
input modes, but the operating procedures
are
the same.
Menu Operation Buttons
Using the remote
control
Use
the
following
buttons
on
the
remote
control
to
operate the menu.
MENU:
Press
to
open
or
close
the menu screen.
£.IT
I~~
.....
:
Press
to
select a desired item on
the
screen
or
adjust a
selected
item.
ENTER:
Press
to
go
to
the
next
step
or
complete
the
setting.
RETURN:
Press
to
return
to
the
previous step.
Using the
control panel
of the TV
You
can
also
operate
the
menu
with the
control
panel
of
the TV.
Button operations on
the
control panel
correspond
to
the ones on
the
remote
control
as
shown
below.
~
I
MENU: MENU
on
the remote
control.
INPUT:
ENTER
on
the
remote
control.
CH/\/V:
Cursor
J;/T
on
the
remote
control.
VOL+
I-:
Cursor
~~
.....
on
the
remote
control.
Page 23
On-Screen Display
Menu
Menu
Items
~
Audio Settings
Example
AVMODE
(Changing
Pic.Quality)
....................
Pages
22
and
32
~~£iight.:
::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::
~~~~
~~
3D
Brightness Boost
(for
the
LE857U,
LE757U
i~ft~~
~H~
II
3D
Surround
(for
the
LE857U, LE757U,
LE755U
and
LE657U
models)
..................
Page
23
and
LE755U
models)
................................
Page
32
Surround
~~~;r
§im
Advanced .............................................
Pages
22-23
C.M.S.-Hue .....................................
Page
22
C.M.S.-Saturation ............................
Page
22
C.M.S.-Value
...................................
Page
22
(for
the
LE650U,
C7500U
and
C6500U models)
................................
Page
23
Bass
Enhancer ............................................
Page
23
Clear
Voice
.......................................
Page
23
Reset.
..........................................................
Page
23
tf!JI
Power Control
Example
Color
Gamut
Range
(for
the
LE857U, LE757U,
LE755U
and
C7500U
models)
....................
Page
22
Color
Temp .....................................
Page
22
Motion Enhancement.. .....................
Page
22
Game
Type
(for
the
LE857U,
LE757U,
LE755U
and
C7500U models)
....................
Page
22
Shutter Effect
(for
the
LE857U,
LE757U,
LE755U
and
C7500U
models)
....................
Page
23
Lamp
Swing
Effect
(for
the
LE857U,
LE757U,
LE755U
and
C7500U
models)
....................
Page
23
Quad
Pixel
Plus
2
(for
the
LE857U
and
LE757U,
models)
...................
Page
23
Active Contrast ................................
Page
23
Gamma
Adjustment .........................
Page
23
Audio
Only
...................................................
Page
24
Power
Saving
..............................................
Page
24
No
Signal
Off
...............................................
Page
24
No
Operation
Off
.........................................
Page
24
Black
Level
......................................
Page
23
Film
Mode ........................................
Page
23
Digital
Noise Reduction ....................
Page
23
Monochrome ...................................
Page
23
Range
of
OPC
.................................
Page
23
Reset
...........................................................
Page
22
r;}'J
System
Options
Example
View
Option
.........................................
Pages
24,
37
APPS
...............................................
Page
24
USB
Operation
Panel
.......................
Page
37
Home Network
(DLNA)
Operation
Panel
...............................
Page
37
View
Mode .......................................
Page
24
Freeze
..............................................
Page
24
Change Audio ..................................
Page
24
Change
CC
......................................
Page
24
3D
Setup
(for
the
LE857U, LE757U,
LE755U
and
LE657U
models)
..................
Page
32
AQUOS
LINK
Setup
....................................
Page
40
Terminal
Setting ..............................
Pages
24-25,
42
Audio
Setup
.....................................
Page
24
PC
input ..........................................
Page
42
Audio
Select
....................................
Page
42
Input Skip
........................................
Page
24
Input
Labei... ....................................
Page
25
HDMI
Setup
.....................................
Page
25
Output Select... ................................
Page
25
Color
System
...................................
Page
25
Menu
Design
...............................................
Page
25
Channel
Selecting
Effect ..................
Page
25
Program
Title
Display
.......................
Page
25
Position ............................................
Page
25
Caption
Setup
..................................
Page
25
Game
Play
Time
..........................................
Page
25
Operation Lock
Out..
...................................
Page
25
Icon
Light
Up
Setting ...................................
Page
25
Quick
Start
Mode ........................................
Page
25
Wallpaper
Setting ........................................
Page
25
Boot Picture ................................................
Page
26
Response
Tone
(for
the
LE857U,
LE757U,
LE755U
and
C7500U
models)
................................
Page
26
Demo
Mode ................................................
Page
26
WallMoum~-
tNol
Reset
EZ
Setup .....................................................
Page
26
Language .........................................
Page
26
Location &
Time
...............................
Page
26
TV
Location .....................................
Page
26
Antenna
&
Cable/STB
......................
Page
26
Air/Cable ..........................................
Page
26
CH
Search
.......................................
Page
26
Network ...........................................
Page
26
Completed
.......................................
Page
26
Broadcasting
Setup
.....................................
Page
26
CH
Setup
.........................................
Page
26
Favorite
CH
......................................
Page
26
Antenna
Setup-DIGITAL
...................
Page
26
Internet Setup
...........................
Pages
37,
42, 44-45
Bluetooth Setup
(for
the
LE857U, LE757U,
LE755U
and
LE657U
models)
..................
Page
27
6f~i~~~f~r;:::
::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::
~~~~
~;
Individual
Setup ....................................
Pages
27-28
Secret
No.
..
....................................
Page
27
Parental
CTRL
..........................
Pages
27-28
Wall
Mount Audio
Setup
..............................
Page
27
Reset.
..........................................................
Page
27
Netfhx
Help
VUDU Help
Identification
................................................
Page
28
Digital
Caption
Info.
..
..................................
Page
28
Software Update ..................................
Pages
28-30
Manual
Update .........................
Pages
29-30
Auto Update Setting ........................
Page
28
Softwere
License
.........................................
Page
52
~o~D
~~:g::
::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::
~~~~
1;
®-
21
Page 24
On-Screen Display Menu
Picture
Settings
Adjusts
the
picture
to
your
preference
with
the
following
picture
settings.
£&
•
For operating the on-screen
display
menu, see page
20.
~
~
: :
·,
··
~button
:
:
:
:
:;i•;y.,.
bi.IU®
·"
Backlight
The screen
The
screen
dims
brightens
Contrast
For
less
For
more
contrast contrast
Brightness
For
less
For more
briahtness briahtness
Color
For
less color
For
~~e
color
intensitv
intensi
Tint
Skin
tones Skin
tones
become
become
reddish areenish
Sharpness
For
less
For
more
sharpness
sharpness
•
You can
select "3D
Brightness Boost" while
in
3D
mode. (For the LE857U, LE757U and LE755U
models)
(See
page 32.)
•
For resetting
all
Picture
adjustment items
to
the facto
ry
preset values,
press
&IT
to
select "Reset",
press
ENTER,
press
&IT
to
select "Yes",
and then press
ENTER
AV
MODE
(Changing
Pic.Quallty)
The
audio
and
video
settings
can
be
changed
to
suit
the
program
or
input
content
being
watched.
£&
•
The
selectable
items vary depending
on the input
source
and
on the
model
of
your
lV.
•
For
details
of
the
selectable
items
in
3D mode, see
page 32. (For the LE857U, LE757U, LE755U and
LE657U
models)
•
You can
select AV MODE
by
pressing
AV
MODE
on
the remote control
unit
See
page 17 for
details
of
AV
MODE
settings.
®-
22
OPe
Setting
Automatically
adjusts
the
brightness
of
the
screen.
Off:
The brightness
is
fixed at the
valu
e
set in
"Backlight".
On:
Automatica
ll
y
adjusts.
On:Display:
Displays
the
OPC effect on the screen
while
adjusting
the
brightness
of
the screen.
liD
•
When set
to
"On",
the Optical Picture
Control (OPC)
senses the surrounding
light
and
automatically
adjusts
the
backlight
brightness. Make sure nothing obstructs
the
OPC sensor, which
could
affect its
abi
li
ty
to
sense
surrounding light.
•
When set
to
"On:Display", OPC
effect
displays
on
the
screen
while
the
OPC
adjusts
the screen brightness.
Advanced Picture
Settings
This
TV
provides
var
ious
advanced
funct
ions
for
optimizing
the
p
icture
quality.
'Ci
M.s.
.""
·.···
····
..
,
:•·/'•
•
····
. ,;""
j
(~
.
OI()~Ma~~t~J
,,
.
;o'·.
Color
tone
is
managed
using
the
si
x-co
l
or
adjustment
setting.
C.M.S.-Hue:
This is a standard
to
adjust the
color
either
mo
re reddish
or
more
bluish
in tone.
C.M.S.-Saturation:
Increases
or
decreases the
saturation
of
a
selected color.
C.M.S.-Value:
A higher
value
makes the image
brighter.
A lower value makes the image darker.
•
For resetting
all
adjustment items
to
the fa
cto
ry preset
values,
press
&IT
to
select "Reset",
and then press
ENTER
Coloroain
' ' , ','
'
;:•
'".
(forillel·~~':,
LE7
..
:
~~
·
1s;Q(Itl
m10dels)
You
can
set
the
color
gamut
range.
Standard:
Standard
color
gam
ut
Expanded:
More vivid
colors
with expanded
color
ga
m
ut
.
• "Colo
r
Gamut
Range"
is
only available
when
AV MODE
is set to
"MO
VIE
"
or
"
MOVIE
(3
D
)".
(;()l()r
Tem
~
(Cijli
..
:r
· · '
..
·2:
,:;
. .
..
.
...
. . . p
..
.
..
.
9.t
..
-..m~re)
.
.•
,.
For
a
be
tt
er
white
ba
lance,
us
e
color
temperature
correction.
High:
White with
bluish
tone
Mid-High:
Middle:
Mid-Low:
Low:
White with reddish tone
Low (Xenon), Low
(Carbon
arc):
Available only
when AV MODE
is
se
t
to
"VINTAGE MOVI
E"
MODE.
Use one of these items
to
make picture
co
l
or
become more reddish. (For the LE857U,
LE757U, LE755U and
C7500U mode
ls)
Wh
ite
balance
can
be
ad
justed
between
a
max
i
mum
of
+30
and a minimum
of
-
30
for each
color
temperature.
R Gain (LO/HI)/G
Gain
(LO/HI)/B
Gain
(LOIHI)
•
Fine
tuning
the
color
temperature
To
fine tu
ne
the
color
temperature
,
set
"1
0 Point
Sett
ing"
to
"On"
.
You
ca
n a
djust
the
"Positio
n"
settin
g.
Adjus
t
the
set
col
or
t
emperature
from
+ 1
to
+
10.
White
balance
can
be
adjusted
between
a maxim
um
of
+30
and
a
min
i
mum
of
-3
0
for
each
color
te
mpe
rature.
•
When
"Position"
is
set to
"10",
you can adjust the white
balance
between
-
30
and
0.
•
For resetting
all
adjustment items
to
the factory preset
values,
press
&IT
to
select "Reset",
and then
pr
ess
ENTER
Use
Motion
Enhanceme
nt
to
view
fas
t-action v
ideo
mo
re
clearly.
..
·····
~·
' •
" ,;;
,:
Deserlptiorl
,
,:
i:.
AquoMotion960
Turn the LED
b
ack
l
~
h
t
on or
AquoMotion480
off for
240
Hz
drive
1sp
lay.
240Hz
For obtaining a clearer i
ma
ge.
AquoMotion240
Turn the LED
ba
ck
l
~
h
t
on or
off for
120Hz
drive
1
sp
lay.
120Hz
High
For obtaining a
cl
earer
imag
e.
120Hz
Low
Off
Ori
gi
na
l
i
mage.
•
LE857
models
AquoMotion960/240Hzl AquoMotion240/120Hz
High/120Hz
Low/Off
•
LE757U
models
AquoMotion480/ AquoMotion240/120Hz
High/120Hz
Low/Off
•
LE755U
models
240Hz/AquoMotion240/120Hz High/120Hz
Low/Off
•
C7500U
models
AquoMotion480/ AquoMotion240/120Hz
High/120Hz Low/Off
•
LE657U
models
AquoMotion240/120Hz High/120Hz
Low
/Off
•
LE650U
and
C6500U
models
120Hz High/120Hz
Lo
w/Off
E.)
• "Motion E
nh
ancement"
may cause image noise.
If
th
is
occurs, tu
rn
the function
"Off".
•
When
AV
MODE
is set
to
"VINTAGE MO
VI
E" MODE
"GAME"
or
'
PC
",
or
PC
fo
mnat
is
be
ing input,
"
Mo
ti
~n
Enhancement"
is n
ot
available.
'' :;t
eL:;
··
:>·1:.
3~~
~)!,
. :.· ..
..
. . .
.,:
~;7~
·
m0dels)
Yo
u
can
adjust pi
cture
q
ua
lity according to
the
typ
e
of
the
game
you
are
pla
yi
ng
.
Standard:
Optimizes
picture
qu
ality
for sta
nda
rd
video games.
High Motion:
Op
t
im
izes
picture
qual
ity
for high
motion vi
deo
ga
mes.
•
"Game Type"
is
n
ot
available depend
in
g on the input
signal
type.
Page 25
On-Screen Display
Menu
Shutter
Eff~t
; • .
<
i . . . · ·
(foi
;
ihe
;
LEaszo,
U!757U,
tE'T~U
andC7500U
.
model~)
Available
only
when
AV
MODE
is
set
to
"VINTAGE
MOVIE' MODE.
This function
makes
the
images
look
like
they
are flickering in
the
same
way
as
old-time
films
or
TV
were
.
L.arrip
swing
en~ct
··
.
. , .
..
. · .
{f0iithe
'
~!!J.~~
..
~E7
.
~and(l75fll}u~l
Available
only when
AV
MODE
is
set
to
"VINTAGE
MOVIE" MODE. When this
funct
io
n is enabled,
the
lamp
light
looks
like
it
is swinging.
You
can
adjust
the
effect
level between
0
and
+3.
Smoothes
diagonal
lines
by
detailed
dot
control.
Advanced:
Produces
smoother diagonal
lines
by
jaggy
removal
process.
Standard:
Produces
smooth
diagonal lines.
Off:
No adjustment.
ltm)
•
When AV MODE
is
set
to
"VINTAGE MOVIE" MODE,
"Quad
Pixel
Plus2"
is not
available.
;Active
co~st
Automatically
adjusts
the
image
contrast
according
to
the
scene
.
Advanced:
Produces higher contrast image
especially
in
dark scene.
Standard:
Produces high contrast image.
Off:
No adjustment.
~
G~mma
Adju~
·
Adjusts
the
differences
of
picture
tones
between
bright
parts
and
dark parts.
The
adjustment
range
of
the
gamma
can
be
set
to
a
maximum
of
+2
and
a
minimum
of
-2
by
pressing
~
or
~
.
u
~1a&1t
;:.:
Adjusts on-screen
black
level
to
your
preferred
level.
High:
The
black level gets brighter.
Low:
The black level
gets darker.
ED
• "Black Level"
is
available
for input
signal
from
Composite Video, Component
480i
and
analog
broadcasts (air and cable).
··
f=ilm
·•Mode
(3~
Pll~7<i(),Will
..
This function
prov
i
des
high-quality pl
ayback
of
images
originally en
cod
ed
at
24
frames
/
second
,
such as films.
Advanced:
Adjusts effect
to
reduce judder from
film
contents.
You
can
select a desired
level
of judder
reduction from
0
to +
10.
Standard:
Plays back images with
equal display
time for each fram
e,
reproducing movie theater
experience.
Off:
Normal
viewing mode.
ID
•
"Film
Mode" does not function depend
in
g on input
signal
type.
•
"Film
Mod
e'
does not function when you set
AV
MODE
to
"VINTAGE
MOVIE" MODE, "GAME"
or
"PC".
• "Standard"
does not function depending on input
signal
type.
()igftal
Noise
.
ReductiQn
Produces a clearer
v
ideo
image.
Auto:
Automatically adjusts the
level
of
noise
reduction.
High/Middle/Low:
You
can
select
a desired
level
for viewing a clearer
video image.
Off:
No adjustment.
ID
• "Digital
Noise Reductio
n"
is
not available
when you set
AV
MODE
to
"PC"
or PC
format is being input.
•
When
AV
MODE
is set to "GAME", "AUTO" is not
available.
:
~hrome
''"
·
;:,:
""'
·
::
For
viewing a video in
monochrome.
Ji~geofOPc
The brightness
level rang
e
of
the
OPC
sens
or's
automatic adjustments can
be
set
accord
i
ng
to y
our
preferences.
The
adjustment range
of
the
OPC
sensor
can
be
set
to a
maximum
of+
16
and a
minimum
of
-
16
.
Max.:
- 15 through + 16
Min.:
-16
through + 15
mm
•
The
"Range
of
OPC" settings are active
only
when
"OPC"
is
set
to
'On".
• The maximum setting cannot be set
to
a
smaller
number than the minimum setting.
•
The minimum setting
ca
nnot be set
to
a bigger number
than the maximum se
tt
ing.
•
Depending
on
the
brightness
of the surrounding
light, the
OPC
sensor might not operate if the adjustment range
is
small.
Audio Settings
You can adjust
the
sound
quality
to
yo
ur preferen
ce
with
the
f
ollow
i
ng
settings
.
ID
•
For operating the on-screen
display
menu, see page
20
.
:
~~~~m
:;..button
~bu~9r.
'"
·
Treble
For weaker For stronger
treble t
reb
le
Bass
For weaker For stronger
bass bass
Decrease audio Decrease audio
Balance
from
the
right from the
le
ft
speaker
speaker
ED
•
The Audio menu is grayed
ou
t when
"Output Select"
is
set
to
"Va
riable
".
(See
page
25
.)
•
For resetting Audio adjustment items to
the factory
preset values,
press
j.
/T
to
select "Reset",
press
ENTER,
press
j.
/T
to
select
"Yes
",
and then press
ENTER.
Different so
und
sources
so
met
imes do
not
have
the
same
loudness
level,
such
as a pr
ogram
and its
commercia
l
breaks.
The
Automat
ic
Vo
lu
me
Control
(Auto Volume)
reduces
this
p
rob
l
em
by equalizing
levels.
High:
Re
duces the
l
oudness
gaps among different
sound sources
strongl
y.
Middle:
t
Low:
Reduces the
loudness gaps among different
sound sources
slightly.
mD
•
The Audio Settings menu i
s grayed out when
"Output
Select"
is set to
"Variable". (See
page 25
.)
T
he
surro
und
function
prod
uc
es
Surround
eff
ec
t
from
the
spea
kers.
30
Stadium:
Re
produces
lif
el
ike experien
ce
of
excitements such that live
sports
or
concert
performances in a stadium create.
30
Hall:
Reproduces concert
ha
ll
experience with
realistic live
surround sound using measured
reverberant sound in the concert
ha
ll.
30
Movie:
Repro
du
ces movie theater experience
with
realistic live
surround sound using measured
reverberant sound in the movie theater.
30
Standard:
Creates 3 dimension
al
surround
sound with deta
il
ed
co
ntrol of the
signal phase.
Normal:
Provides mild surround sound.
Off:
Outputs
the
no
rm
al
sound.
mm
•
The Audio Settings menu is
grayed out when
"Output
Select"
is set to
"Variable
".
(See
page 25
.)
•
For some discs, setup
ma
y
be
required on your BD/
DVD
player.
In
this case, please refer to the operation
manu
al
of
your BD/DVD
player.
The
surro
und
function
prod
uc
es
Sur
r
ound
e
ff
ec
t
f
rom
the speakers.
1m
•
The Audio Settin
gs
menu is grayed
ou
t when
"Output
Select"
is set to
"Variable'.
(Se
e page 25.)
•
For
so
me
discs, setup may be requi
red
on
your BD/
DVD
player. In
this case,
please
refer to t
he
operation
ma
nu
al
of
your BD/DVD playe
r.
This function
all
ows
you
to
enjoy bass-en
ha
nced
sound
.
mm
•
The Audio Settings me
nu is grayed out when
"Ou
tp
ut
Sel
ec
t"
is set
to
"Va
ri
ab
le". (See
page 25.)
Clear
Voiee
· ·
This fu
nction
emphasizes
speech
against
bac
k
ground
noise f
or
great
er
clari
ty
.
rm
• The Audio Settin
gs
menu is grayed
ou
t wh
en
"Ou
tp
ut
Select"
is set
to
"Vari
ab
le". (See page 2
5.
)
®-
23
Page 26
On-Screen Display Menu
Power
Control
Power
control
setting
allow
s y
ou
to
save energy.
mm
• For operating the on-screen display menu,
see
page 2
0.
When
listening
to
music
from a music
program
, y
ou
can
turn
the
screen
off
and
enjoy
audio only.
• The screen image will return
to
normal when a button
(except those for audio adjustment, such as
VOL
,
MUTE)
is
pressed.
This function
allows
you
to
set
the
Power
Saving
level in
order
to
decrease
the
power
consumpti
on
and
increase
the
backlight
lifespan.
Standard: Optimizes
po
wer reduction based upon
video content. When set
to
"Standard", "
jf
"
appears on the screen.
Advanced: Optimizes power reduction bas
ed
upon
video
co
ntent and engages OP
C.
When set to
"Advanced",
"Ifill" appears on the screen.
Off: This function does
not
work.
• "Power Saving" does not fu
nc
tion when you set AV
MODE
to
"AUTO"
or
"DYNAMIC
(Fi
xed)".
• You cannot select a different Power Saving item for
each
AV
MODE.
When "Power
Sa
ving" is set, the "OPC" settings for a
ll
AV Modes will automatically change.
-If
you set "OPC"
to
"On" when "Power Saving" is set
to
"Standard", then the "Power Saving" setting w
ill
change
to
"Advanced".
-When
you change the "Power Saving" setting fr
om
"Advanced" to "Off"
or
to "Standard", "OPC" wi
ll
be
set to "Off".
-"AU
TO" and "DYNAMIC (Fixed)"
will
remain set
to
"Off".
• When "Power Saving"
is
set to "Standard"
or
"Advanced", the Power Saving leaf icon appears
to
the
left
of
"OPC"
in
the Picture Settings menu screen.
• "Power Saving" is not availab
le
when the
TV
is in
3D mode.
(For
the LE857U, LE757U, LE755U and
LE657U models)
®-
24
When
this
functi
on
is enabled,
the
TV automatically
shuts
down
if
no signal is received
for
more
than
15
minutes.
• When it is 5 minutes befo
re
the p
owe
r shuts down,
the remaining ti
me
will start
to
keep app
eari
ng every
minute.
• When a TV pro
gra
m finishes, this function may not
operate.
When
you
enable
this function,
the
TV autom
atically
shuts down
if
no oper
ation is perfo
rmed
for more
th
an 3 ho
urs
.
• When it is
5 minutes before the
po
wer shuts down,
the remaining ti
me will
start to keep appearing every
minute.
System
Options
ED
• For operating the on-scr
een
displ
ay menu
, see page 20.
These fun
ctions
are useful for adjusting the audio
a
nd
video settings.
The View Option functions can
be ope
rated
with
the remo
te cont
rol unit.
The applic
ation
wind
ow
can be d isplay
ed
by
selecting "APPS" on
the ME
NU screen.
• You can display the app
li
cation window by pressing
SmartCentral on the remote control unit. (See page
16.)
Th
is function
changes the sc
reen size.
Sel
ec
t "View
Option"
on
the menu
to
displa
y the
Vi
ew Mode menu
scree
n.
The View Mode menu varies depending on the input
source.
• You
ca
n select View Mode by pressing VIEW
MODE
on the remote control unit.
- See pages
18
and
19
for adjusting the video being
input from a TV, other
au
diovisual equipment, USB-
Video, DLNA-Video
or
Internet applications.
- S
ee
page 19 for adjusti
ng
the video being input from
a PC.
All
ows you to
captur
e a
nd
freeze a
moving ima
ge
th
at you are
watching.
• You can select Freeze
by
pressing FREEZE on the
remote co
nt
rol unit. See page 16 for details
of
Freeze
function.
A
ll
ows you
to
change
the
audio when
mul
tiple audio
is available for
the program y
ou
are
wat
chi
ng.
em
• You can change Audio by pressing AUDIO on t
he
remote control unit. See page 17 for details
of
Audio
fu
nction.
Gb~J'19f;JCC
Allo
ws you
to chan
ge the Closed
Cap
tion display
.
Selec
t "Change CC" on the
men
u to display the
Closed
Capti
on
inf
orma
tion.
• The information displa
ye
d varies depend
ing
on the
pro
gr
am y
ou
are watching.
ra
• You c
an
change Closed Caption by pressing
CC
on
t
he
remote control unit. See page 18 for details of
Closed Caption function.
You can out
pu
t digital audio to
an
AV amplifier or
sim
il
ar device whose DIGITAL AUDIO INP
UT
terminal is
connected to
the DI
GIT
AL AUDI
O OUT terminal on the
TV.
Pl
ease sele
ct
an
audio output format compatible with
the au
dio format of the program you are watching and
the equipment conn
ec
ted.
PCM: For
co
nnecting to equipment that does not
support Dolby Digit
al
and DTS.
The same audio
(main, sub,
or
main/sub) as the audio of the
progr
am
being viewed is output.
2-c
hannel
audio with a sampling rate of
48
kHz or
less is ou
tp
ut as linear PCM audio.
Bitstream: For
connec
ting
to
an audi
o system that
suppo
rt
s Dolby Digital and DTS. Audio is output
throu
gh
both the ma
in
and sub channels.
mm
• Analog channel audio and video input audio are output
in
PCM mode even when "Bitstream" is selected.
• PCM digit
al
input signals are output in PCM
mod
e
even when "Bitstream" is selected.
This set
ti
ng all
ows you to skip the TV, HDMI
or
PC
IN
Inp
ut ("TV", "PC IN", "HDMI 1", "HDMI 2", "HDMI
3" a
nd
"HDMI 4")
on the Input Selecti
on ope
ration.
• If you connect external equipment
to
an
HDMI
IN terminal which you have set to be skipped, a
notification message appears on the display when
a signal is received from the conn
ec
ted external
equipment. Press "Yes" to reset the relat
ed
skipping
se
tt
ing so that the input terminal becom
es
availab
le.
Page 27
On-Screen Display Menu
Lets
you
set
the
input terminal displayed
when
using
the
INPUT
Jist
or
channel
displa
y. Press
JJ./"
I.,..;..,..
to
select
the
new
name
for
the input
mode.
• Using the software keyboard, you can enter
up
to
10 characters for text. (See page 45.)
f!l'D
•
You
cannot change labels if the input source is
TV,
Home Network
(DLNA)
or
USB.
When
you
view
images
sent
from
external
equipment
in an HDMI connection,
this
function
allows
the
image size
on
the
TV
to
automatically switch
to
an
appropriate
one
.
ED
• Refer
to
your external equipment operation manual for
the signal type.
• When connecting a DVJ-HDMI
co
nversion adapter/
cable
to
the
HOM!
IN
terminal, the image may not
come
in
clearly.
Allows
you
to
select what controls
the
audio o
utput.
Fixed:
Sound
via
speaker
is
adjusted with VOL+
I-
on the remote control unit
or
on the
TV.
Sound via the AUDIO
OUT terminal
is
not
adjustable and outputs at a consistent level.
Variable: Sound via the AUDIO OUT terminal
is
adjusted with VOL+ I-on
the remote control unit
or on the
TV.
Sound
via
speaker
is
muted.
Select
the
video signal
system
compatible
with
your
equipment
from
the
list
below:
Auto/NTSC/PAL-M/PAL-N
ED
•
'Co
lor System" can only be set tor the
VIDEO
IN 1 or
2.
•
If
you have already set the
Secr
et No., input the 4-digit
secret number here. See page 27 tor setting a secret
number.
You can select
whether
to
use
tra
nsition effects
when changing channels.
•
In
some cases, "Channel Selecting Effect"
doe
s not
work.
Select
the
CH
dis
play
when
changing
channe
ls
for
digital
broadcasting
.
For adjusting a
picture's
horizontal
and
vertical
position.
H-Pos.: Centers the image by moving it
to the
left or
right.
V-Pos.: Centers the image by moving it up or down.
• For resetting adju
st
ments
to
the factory preset values,
press
Jrr,,/.,
to
select "Reset", and then press
ENTER.
• When connecting a PC to the HDMI IN termi
nal
, the
image position will be automatically adjusted. It cannot
be manually adjusted.
• The screen position variable ranges depend
on
the
View Mode or the signal type. The ranges can
be
seen
on the position-setting screen.
• Adjustments are sto
re
d separately according to input
source.
• "Position" does not
work
when USB mod
e,
Home
Network (DLNA) mode or
an
Internet application is
used.
• You may not
be
able
to
adjust the position while in
30
mode. (For the LE857U, LE757U, LE755U and
LE657U models)
This function
allows
you
to
adjust
the
closed
capt
ion
screen
appearance
to
suit
your
preference.
Caption
Size/Font
Style/Foreground Color/
Foreground Opacity/Background Color/
Background
Opacity/Character
Edge
• For resetting adjustments
to
the factory preset values,
press
Jrr,,/.,
to
select "Reset", and then press
ENTER.
• The default value depends on the broadcasting station.
This functi
on
will ena
ble
the
TV
to
display
the
elapsed
ti
me
every
30
minutes,
so
that
you
do
not
become
too
absorbed
in
game
playing
to
keep
tra
ck
of time.
Switch
the
input
source
to
"GAME'
to
activate
the
function.
Th
is functi
on
locks
the
opera
tion
buttons
on
the
TV
and
the
remo
te
control.
Off: No adjustment.
RC Control Lock: All bu
ttons
on the remote control
are locked.
Button Control Lock: A
ll
buttons on the TV, except
POWER, are locked .
When "RC Control Lock" or "Button Control L
ock
" is
selected, a confirmation
screen
appears.
Yes:
Locks the operation buttons.
No:
No adjustment.
• To unlock the buttons on the remote control
by
using
the control pan
el
of the TV (see page 20):
G)
Press MENU
to
display the MENU screen, press
VOL+
I-
to
select "System Options", and then
press
INPUT.
®Press
CH/\IV
to select "Operation Lock Out",
and then press
INPUT.
@Press
CHAIV
to select "
Off"
, and then press
INPUT.
@Press
MENU to exit.
• To unlo
ck
the buttons on the
TV,
press MENU on the
remote control , and then select "Off" in "Operation
L
ock
Out".
Whe
n this functi
on
is
set
to
"On", t
he
LED
on
the
front
of
the
TV
turns on.
• LE857U, LE757U, LE755U and LE657U models
• The L
ED lights
white in 20 mode.
• The L
ED
lights blue
in
30
mode.
• "O
n"
is the factory preset val
ue.
If you want
to
turn off
the
LED
, set the function to "Off".
When
this func
tion
is
activated, you
can
reduce
the TV
's start-up
time
or even let
the
TV
in
standby
mode start
displaying i
mag
es
and
so
on via the
connected equipment
on the network.
miD
• Setting "Qui
ck
Start Mode" to "O
n"
consumes more
power.
Th
is function is available only wh
en
"Qui
ck
Start
Mode
" is
set
to "On
(Wallpaper Mode)".
Activating
the
function will
display sti
ll
images
whe
n
the
TV
is in
standby
mode
.
For the wallpaper, you can select either the still images
pre-installed
in
the TV
or
your favorite sti
ll
images stored
in the USB memory device.
Pre-Installed: The images pre-installed in the TV wi
ll
be displayed
in
a slideshow.
USB:
Your favorite images stored for the wallpaper
w
ill
appear.
If only a single sti
ll
image is stor
ed
in the U
SB
memory device, that image wi
ll
be displayed as
the
wallpaper. When there are multiple sti
ll
images
in the memory,
all
the images wi
ll
be displayed in
a slideshow.
liD
• Images a
re
displayed in 3-minute intervals as a
sli
deshow.
• When the TV is
in
Wallpaper m
ode
, you can turn off
the TV
by
pressing and holdi
ng
POWER on the TV tor
5 second
s.
- Just before the TV turns off, the last image shown
when t
he
TV was turned off appea
rs briefl
y.
- Your settings may not
be
saved in some cases.
•
When
you display images
by
using
the
USB
memory
device:
• Create a folder named "WP" in the root directory
of
the
USB memory device (the
fi
rst directory when the USB
memory device is opened), a
nd
sto
re
into the fol
der
the sti
ll
images you want to display for the wallpape
r.
• You m
ust
insert the USB memory device into the USB
termin
al
before turnin
g off the TV.
• If there are images on the USB memory device but
they
do
not
appear on the screen, switch to U
SB
mod
e and check whether the image files on the U
SB
memory device are shown correctly.
You can set the
le
ngth of time the TV wi
ll
remain in the
Wallpaper Mode.
3 hoursl6 hoursl12 hours l24 hours
• No buttons except f
or
POWER
work
even while
the
still images are being displayed.
• If the ready-for-use USB memory device is not
inserted, the sti
ll
images pre-installed in the
TV will
be
displayed
in
a slideshow even
whe
n "Da
ta
Source" is
set
to
"USB
".
• Because the USB memory device cannot be detected
i
mme
diately after t
he
TV is tumed on from stan
dby
mode, the wallpaper pre-installed in t
he
TV
may be
displayed even when "Data Source" is set to "USB".
• The sti
ll
images w
ill
be displayed until the set ti
me
has
elapsed.
• If you do not want to use the wallpaper as described
above, set "Quick Start Mode' to "On"
or
"Off".
®-
25
Page 28
On-Screen Display Menu
With this function activated,
the
SHARP
logo
will
be
displayed
when
you
turn on
the
TV.
• This function
is
not available when the TV
is
set
to
"Quick Start Mode".
With this item set
to
"On",
the
TV
will
give
off
operation
sound
when
you
use
the
SmartCentral
function.
• If an external speaker
is
used, the operation sound will
not be heard.
You
can
select the image from several
types
of
demo
mode.
If
you have selected "Auto Play", you need to select
the desired playback type(s), and then set the
playback time.
Continuous: Plays demos continuously.
10 min.: Plays demos every 10 minutes.
20 min.: Plays demos every 20 minutes.
• What kinds of setting item are available depends on
the model of your
lV.
• This function
will
be canceled when you press EXIT on
the remote control unit.
• "Demo Mode" may not be selected depending on input
signal type or application status.
• "Demo Mode" may be automatically canceled
depending on input signal type.
®-
26
Initial Setup
•
For
operating the on-screen display menu,
see
page
20.
• When you select "EZ Setup", "CH Setup", "Parental
CTRL" or "Reset", you can enter the 4-digit secret
number
here.
See page 27 for setting a secret number.
You
can
run EZ
Setup
again, even after
setting
up
the
preset channels.
Language: Select from among 3 languages
(English,
French and Spanish).
Location & Time: Make settings for the country,
area and time zone where you use the
lV.
Select your country: Select either "United
States", "Canada"
or
"Mexico".
Select your
time
zone: Select your time zone.
The available settings differ depending on the
selected country.
Select DST (Daylight Savings Time): Select
"Auto", "Manual" or "Off".
TV Location: Select "Home"
or
"Store" for the
location where you plan
to
install the
lV.
This
product qualifies for ENERGY STAR
in
Home
mode default setting.
Home: "Power Saving"
is
set
to
"Advanced", and
AV MODE
is
set
to
"STANDARD (ENERGY
STAR)".
Store: "Power Saving"
is
set
to
"Off" and AV
MODE
is
set
to
"DYNAMIC (Fixed)". Picture
Reset and Feature Demo can be set.
Picture Reset: AV MODE will be set
to
"DYNAMIC (Fixed)" regardless of whether
Picture Reset
is
"On" or "Off".
If
you select
"On",
AV
MODE will be reset to "DYNAMIC
(Fixed)"
if
there
is
no
operation for 30
minutes. When "Off"
is
selected, AV MODE
will be set
to
"DYNAMIC (Fixed)".
Feature Demo: When "On"
is
selected, after
all
the settings are completed, the Feature
Demo screen is displayed
if
there
is
no
operation for several minutes.
• ENERGY STAR qualification
is
based on AV
MODE "STANDARD (ENERGY STAR)".
Antenna & Cable/STB: Select the type of
connection you will use to watch
lV.
Air/Cable: Make sure what kind of connection
is
made with your
lV
when selecting "Air"
or
"Cable".
CH Search: Channel auto search makes the
lV
look
for
all
channels viewable
in
the set area.
•
If
"Cable"
is
selected for Antenna setting,
scrambled channels are removed after the
Channel search has been completed.
Network: When you connect to the Internet
on
the
lV,
confirm the connection method and make
adjustments.
• Wireless LAN connection
is
possible only when
the WPS (push button) method
is
used. If any
other method
is
used, make settings by Initial
Setup
> Internet Setup > Network Setup.
(See
pages 44
to
45.)
Completed: The settings confirmation screen
is
displayed. Confirm the information displayed on
the screen.
• See Initial Installation on pages 14 to 15 for setting
each item.
• If no channel
is
found, confirm the type of connection
made with your
lV
and try
"EZ
Setup" again.
• If you select "Analog Search Start" and initiate the
channel search, the CH Memory for Cable Digital will
be deleted.
If Initial Installation
does
not
memorize
all
the
channels in
your
region, follow
the
instructions
below
to
manually
memorize
the
channels.
Air/Cable: Make sure what kind
of
connection
is
made with your
lV
when selecting "Air" or
"Cable".
CH
Search: Channel auto search makes the
lV
look
for
all
channels viewable
in
the set
area.
CH Memory: You can select the channels to skip
in
each ANALOG
(Air),
ANALOG (Cable), DIGITAL
(Air)
and DIGITAL (Cable).
On: Skips channels. (Channel selection disabled
using
CH
/\IV.)
Off: Does not skip channels. {Channel selection
enabled using
CH/\IV.)
Remove Scrambled CH: This function makes the
lV
look for and then delete digital cable channels
that are scrambled and so unavailable
in
the
set area. The process may take more than 20
minutes.
Yes: Starts to remove scrambled channels.
No: This function does not work.
• See Initial Installation on pages 14 to
15
for setting
each item.
•
If
no channel
is
found, confirm the type of connection
made with your
lV
and try channel search
again.
•
If
you select "Analog Search Start" and initiate the
channel search, the CH Memory for Cable Digital
will
be deleted.
fav~te<:;H(Favome
Cban~l
~ttiog)
This
function
allows
you
to
program
4 favorite
channels, in 4 different categories. By setting the
favorite
channels
in
advance,
you
can select
your
favorite
channels
easily.
To
register
your
favorite
channel:
Select "Register" and then press ENTER. Press
JJ..I
T I ... I ...
to
select the position
in
the category, and
then press
ENTER to register.
To
delete
your
favorite
channel:
Select
"1
Data Clear" and then press ENTER.
Press
1!;,/T
I
..,.1.,.
to select the channel you want
to delete, and then press
ENTER. Select "Yes" and
then press
ENTER.
To delete
all
the favorite channels, select
"All
Data
Clear".
• Before setting the channel, select the channel you
want
to
register
as
a favorite channel.
• You can display the "Favorite CH" screen by pressing
FAVORITE
CH
on the remote control.
In
order
to
receive digital air broadcasts, you
need
a digital
broadcast
antenna. You can confirm
the
antenna
configuration
through
the
"Antenna
Setup-
DIGITAL"
screen.
If necessary, adjust the
direction
of
the
antenna
to
obtain
the
maximum
signal strength.
Signal Strength: The signal strength of DIGITAL
channel
is
displayed. The signal information
is
based on the current channel.
Channel Strength: Input the 2-digit channel number
to
check the signal strength of the selected
channel.
Make sure the signal
is
strong enough
for each channel.
• This function
is
available for
DIGITAL
(Air)
only.
Page 29
On-Screen Display Menu
Bluetooth
setUp
(for the
1.E857U,
I.:E757U,
I..E75SU
and
I.:E~U
model$)
Set
this function when using the bluetooth devices
with your 1V.
See
page 47 for
how
to use the devices.
mm
•
When
you
use
the
Bluetooth
device
with
your
TV
for
the
first
time,
you
must
make
pairing
between
the
device
and
the
TV.
Once
the
pairing
is
correctly
carried
out,
the Bluetooth device
will
be
registered
on
the
TV.
You
can add, delete or select Bluetooth devices
in
the registration.
• Addition
of
a Bluetooth Device
Before making the settings, press the Connect
button on the Bluetooth device you want to connect.
1 Press
<0111/~
to
select "Search", and then press
ENTER.
2 Model names of the detected devices will be
displayed. Select the device with the message
"New" attached, and then press ENTER.
•
When a keyboard
is
being
paired
with
the
TV,
a
PIN
code
will
be
displayed.
Enter
the
PIN
code
using
the
keyboard,
and
then
press
"Enter"
key
on
the
keyboard.
•
When
you
periorm pairing
operation
on a mouse,
select
"Yes",
and
then
press
ENTER.
3 After the message indicating the pairing
is
complete has been displayed, click "OK".
• Deletion
of
a Bluetooth Device
1 Press
J,/T
to
select the device to delete, and
then press
ENTER.
2 Press
JJ./T
to select "Delete", and then press
ENTER.
• Selection
of
a Bluetooth Device
1 Press
JJ./T
to select the device to use, and then
press
ENTER.
2 Press
JJ./T
to select "Select", and then press
ENTER.
•
See
also
the instruction
manual
supplied
with
the
Bluetooth
device.
•
You
can
register
up
to 6
devices
to the
TV,
but
only
one
keyboard
and
mouse
can
be
used
at a time.
•
If
a device
for
which
"Selected"
is
displayed
does
not operate
properly,
try
searching
and
selecting
the
device
again.
•
The
keyboard
or
mouse
may
not
operate
properly
depending
on
the
application
being
used.
•
The
Bluetooth
device
may
not
operate
properly
depending
on
the
device
being
used.
You can also select a language from the Initial Setup
menu. Select from among 3 languages: English,
French and Spanish.
This selects the optimal audio for the program you
are currently watching even when the
1V
is
mounted
to
a wall.
If complex adjustments are made and the settings
cannot be restored
to
normal, you can reset the
settings to the factory preset values.
•
If
you
have
already
set
the
Secret
No.,
input
the
4-digit
secret number
here.
ED
•
The
Channel
Setup
settings
will
not
be
changed.
•
The
Language
settings
will
not
be
changed.
•
The
Secret number settings
will
not
be
changed.
•
The
TV
Location
settings
will
not
be
changed.
Allows you to use a secret number
to
protect certain
settings from being accidentally changed.
IMPORTANT:
Three conditions must be met
to
enable the V-Chip
(see pages 27 to
28):
1. Secret No.
is
registered.
2. V-ChipN-Chip
(DTV
Only)
settings
have
been
made.
•
The
"V-Chip
(DTV
Only)"
will
only
be
selectable
when a new
rating
system
can
be
downloaded
via
digital
broadcasting
in
the
U.S.
3. "Status"
is
set to "On".
• Setting Secret No.
You
can
set
and
change
the
secret
number
by
using
0-9.
Yes:
Changes
or
sets
the
Secret
No.
No:
The
confirmation
screen
to
clear
the
Secret
No.
appears
when
the
Secret
No.
has
been
set.
When
the
Secret
No.
has
not
been
set,
the
previous
screen
will
be
displayed.
•
Secret
No. Clear
You can clear your secret number.
Yes:
Your
secret
number
is
cleared.
No:
Your
secret
number
is
not
cleared.
•
As
a precautionary
measure,
make
a note of
your
secret number
and
keep
it
in a familiar
place.
•
If
the secret
number
is
cleared,
the
Status
setting
automatically
sets
to
"Off".
"V-Chip"
and
"Status"
will
not
be
selectable
from
the
menu.
Used to enable or disable the parental control
function. This function will not be selectable from
the menu if you do not first configure your secret
number.
V-CHIP
is
an
electronic filtering device built into your
1V. This tool gives parents a great degree of control
over broadcasts accessed by their children. It allows
parents
to
select programs judged suitable for child
viewing while blocking ones judged not suitable.
It
does so automatically once you activate the V-CHIP
feature
in
your 1V. "V-Chip" and "Status" will not be
selectable from the menu if you
do
not first configure
your secret number.
•
The
U.S.
has
two
rating
systems for viewing content:
TV
Parental
Guidelines
and
movie
ratings.
•
The
TV
Parental
Guidelines
work
in
conjunction
with
the
V-CHIP
to
help
parents
screen
out inappropriate
television
shows
from
their children.
•
Movie
ratings
are
used
for
original
movies
rated
by
the
Motion
Picture
Association of America
(MPAA)
as
watched
on
cable
TV
and
not edited
for
television.
The
V-CHIP
can
also
be
set
to block MPAA-rated
movies.
•
The
setting
automatically enters "Block" for
any
ratings
below
your
selection.
•
If
Status
is
not
set
to
"On",
the
configuration settings
will
not
work.
•
MPAA
(Voluntary movie rating system)
Press
JJ./T
to
adjust the item
to
your desired
position.
"i" indicates the item
is
blocked. Press
MENU
to
exit.
G:
General
audiences.
All
ages
admitted.
PG:
Parental
guidance suggested.
Some
material
may
not
be
suitable
for children.
PG-13:
Parents
strongly cautioned.
Some
material
may
be
inappropriate for
children
under
13.
R:
Restricted.
Under
17
requires
accompanying
parent
or
adult
guardian
(age
varies
in
some jurisdictions).
NC-17:
No
one
17
and
under admitted.
X:
X
is
an
older
rating
that
is
unified
with NC-17 but
may
be
encoded
in
the
data of older
movies.
•
Voluntary
movie
rating
system
only
uses
an
age-based
rating.
®-
27
Page 30
On-Screen Display Menu
•
TV
Parental Guidelines
Suggested
age
TV-Y:
All
children.
TV-Y7: Directed to older children.
TV-G: General audience.
TV-PG: Parental Guidance suggested.
TV-14: Parents strongly cautioned.
TV-MA: Mature audience only.
When setting an individual content-based rating
item:
1 Press
~
or
ENTER
to
access
blocked
content
items
from
the
currently selected
age-based
rating item.
2 Press
J;/T
to
select
an individual item,
and
then
press
ENTER
to
unblock
it ("6"
is
removed).
Repeat
the
same
steps
for
the
other
items.
3 Press
-<111
or
RETURN
to
register after all
individual
content
rating items are set.
Content
FV:
Fantasy violence.
V:
Violence.
5: Sexual situation.
L:
Adult language.
D:
Sexually suggestive dialog.
FV
TV-Y
~
TV-Y7
X
~'
onnocfarl
TV-G
TV-PG
TV-14
TV-MA
••canteht
v s
~
~
~
~
~ ~
X X
X X
X X
L
~
~
~
X
X
X
D
~
~
~
X
X
~
:
The
content
rating
can
be
set,
but
this rating is
not
normally
broadcast
by
TV
stations.
X :
Content
rating
can
be
set.
®-
28
Canadian Rating Systems (Canadian English
ratings and Canadian French ratings)
• The TV rating systems
in
Canada are based on the
Canadian Radio-Television and Telecommunications
Commission
(CRTC)
policy
on
violence
in
television
programming.
• While violence
is
the most important content element
to be rated, the structure developed takes into
consideration other program content like language,
nudity, sexuality and mature themes.
• When setting the V-CHIP
on
the Canadian system you
can choose either the Canadian English ratings or the
Canadian French ratings.
• Canadian English Ratings
E:
Exempt: Includes news, sports, documentaries
and other information programming; talk shows,
music videos, and variety programming.
C:
Children: Intended for younger children under the
age of 8 years. Pays careful attention to themes
that could threaten their sense
of
security and
well-being.
C8+: Children over 8 years old: Contains no portrayal
of violence
as
the preferred, acceptable, or only
way
to
resolve conflict; nor encourage children
to imitate dangerous acts which they may see on
the screen.
G:
General: Considered acceptable for
all
age
groups. Appropriate viewing for the entire family,
contains very little violence, physical, verbal or
emotional.
PG:
Parental Guidance: Intended for a general
audience, but may not be suitable for younger
children (under the age of
8)
because it could
contain controversial themes or issues.
14+: Over 14 years: Could contain themes where
violence
is
one of the dominant elements of
the storyline, but
it
must be integral
to
the
development of plot or character. Language
usage could be profane and nudity present within
the context of the theme.
18+: Adults: Intended for viewers 18 years and older
and might contain depictions
of
violence, which
while related to the development of plot, character
or themes,
are
intended for adult viewing. Could
contain graphic language and portrayals of sex
and nudity.
• Canadian French Ratings
E:
Exempt programming.
G:
General:
All
ages and children, contains minimal
direct violence, but may be integrated into the plot
in
a humorous or unrealistic manner.
Sans+:
General but inadvisable for young children:
May be viewed by a wide public audience, but
could contain scenes disturbing
to
children under
8 who cannot distinguish between imaginary and
real
situations.
Recommended for viewing with parent.
13ans+: Over 13 years: Could contain scenes
of frequent violent scenes and therefore
recommended for viewing with parent.
16ans+: Over 16 years: Could contain frequent
violent scenes and intense violence.
18ans+: Over 18 years: Only for adult viewing. Could
contain frequent violent scenes and extreme
violence.
•
How
to temporarily release
the
V-CHIP
BLOCK
When
the
V-CHIP
BLOCK
is
working
and
censors
a broadcast, "V-CHIP HAS BEEN ACTIVATED."
displays.
1 Press ENTER while
the
V-CHIP
is working,
and
then
the
secret
number
setting
menu
displays.
2 Input
the
4-digit secret
number
by
using
0-9.
At
this time V-CHIP
BLOCK
temporarily
releases.
• Reactivating the temporarily released
V-CHIP
BLOCK
You can reactivate
the
temporarily released V-CHIP
BLOCK
as
shown
below.
• Select "Status" setting from the Parental CTRL menu
to reactivate BLOCK.
(See
page 27.)
• Select "V-Chip" setting ("MPAA", "TV Guidelines",
"Can. English Ratings" or "Can. French Ratings") from
the Parental CTRL to reactivate BLOCK.
(See
pages
27 to
28.)
• Switch off the
TV
power.
• Performing
any
of the three above will activate the
V-CHIP BLOCK.
Information
•
For
operating the on-screen display
menu,
see
page
20.
The current version
of
the
TV
software
is
displayed.
This function allows viewing
of
digital closed caption
information
for
the
digital
broadcast
program being
viewed.
• This list
is
not displayed for analog broadcasts or
external input audio/video.
• This information
is
not included
in
CC1, CC2, Text1, or
Text2, and is not displayed
in
a list.
This
is
used
to
upgrade
the
system
software
to
enhance
the
TV
functions.
1 Press
MENU
to
display
the
MENU screen, and
then
press
-<111/~
to
select "Information".
2 Press
1._/T
to
select "Software Update", and
then
press
ENTER.
•
If
you have already set the Secret
No.,
go
to
step
3.
3 Input
the
4-digit
secret
number
by
using 0-9.
4 Press 1._/"f
to
select "Manual Update"
or
"Auto
Update
Setting", and
then
press ENTER.
• The operations thereafter vary depending on the
setting.
AUto
UPdate
setting
When
the
TV
is on,
or
when
an Internet application
is
being
accessed,
this
function enables
the
TV
to
connect
to
the
network
and
check
for
updates
automatically.
When an
update
is
available, a message
is
displayed.
Press
-<111/~
to
select "Yes",
and
then press ENTER
to
display
the
download
screen. (See page 30.)
• This function does not work when a broadband
connection or Internet Setup
is
not available.
• A message may also be displayed
when
an
application
is
running .The message varies depending
on
the
application.
Page 31
On-Screen Display Menu
Manual
Update
Select
the
method
for
manually updating the
software.
.._
USB Update:
O)Jdates
the software
using
a USB
memory device containing the update
file.
(See
"Updating the Software with a USB Memory
Device
".)
Network Update: Downloads the update
file
via
the network
and
then updates the software.
(See
page
30.)
• A broadband connection and Internet Setup are
required
to
update the software using the network.
(See
pages 44
to
45.)
• It may take time to access and download the update
depending on the Internet connection
and
other
factors.
•
Updating
the
Software
with a USB
Memory
Device
To
check
for the availability
of
a software update,
visit
http:/
/www.sharousa.com
/products/supportl.
If
you
have
any
questions, please
ca
ll 1-800-BE
-SHARP (800-237 -4277).
• Do not remove the USB memory device
or
unplug
the
AC
cord while the software is being updated.
• Be sure
to
properly follow the whole procedure
described below, step by step. Otherwise, for
example, the
TV
cannot read the data
in
the
USB
memory device and software updating will fail.
1 Insert the
USB
memory
device with the
update
file into
the
USB 1
or
USB
2 terminal
on
the
1V.
• When
you
update the software, use only one USB
terminal. Either USB 1 or USB 2
is
usable.
2 Press
JJ./T
on
the
Manual
Update
screen
to
select "USB Update",
and
then press ENTER.
3 Press ENTER
to
start checking
the data
in
the
USB
memory device.
• Insert
~
USB
mernpzy
de
'llee •
con
taining
lhll
<K>f!Ware
tJpdate me.
~
--
·
~
~
' !
' l ' " • "
~
'
4 During
the
data checking, "Checki
ng"
blinks.
;.,
h
a{
", o "
g"
•.
.
~
~·ltl<tdtlli!
' . .
• .
Ill
tH~
ll
!ll.hnemory
device
. · · · ·
' ·-
,."
• 1• , , • ' ' ~ ,
,H.a
'l
/ 1
o The current version of the
TV
software and the
version
of
the update file on the USB memory
device are displayed.
Example
o
If
the USB memory device is not proper
ly
installed
or the correct update
fil
e cannot be found on
the USB mem
ory
device,
an
error message is
displayed.
Check the
fi
le
on
the USB memory device, and
then reinsert t
he
USB memo
ry
devi
ce correc
tly.
- ' .
SO!tWareupdateli
letsnot
detect~m
the
usa
rnemory
de'llct!.'
Conflrm
lll
at
)lOll
Mile
tranSferre
d
lt\(1
file
to
the
USB rni®Ofll
d!iVICII and
tli
i!Y
softW
are
tJpd
a!e
.
' ' . '
__
..
-
._
..
_-.
_·:·:.'':.-.:
'Tner..
1~rnore
tMn
~e-S\lltWafil!lle
In the
usa~ d
~.
Con.fir
m m
a
tooly
~'$0f!WI;ll'~
~ptll\te
fi
le
I"
In the U
SB
men)(l!'f device. •
...
.
:·.
" ; " P
"BO ~ B ' ' :
5
To update
the
TV
software with the upda
te file,
selec
t "Yes",
and then pr
ess
ENTER.
•
Example
• Do not remove the USB memory device
or
unplug
the AC cord while
the
software is being updated.
6 When
the
software
is
successfully updated
, a
sc
reen is displayed indi
cat
ing that the update
pr
ocess is completed.
After this screen is displayed, t
he
TV
au
tomatically
turns off
and then turns
on
again .
Example
. · :: ...
!l<>ftwar
e:Updatefs'~
~
.,;:.;
~
' ' , : t
Z"
,
•
!.l
pdateVat$1
cn
• - ;
~
· •
, ,
~
·
,;
~
- '
• If the update has failed, check the file
in
the USB
me
mo
ry
device and t
ry
Software Update agai
n.
7 Aft
er the
screen s
hown below
is displayed, pr
ess
ENTER.
8 Remove the
USB memo ry device.
@-
29
Page 32
On-Screen
Display
Menu
•
Updating
the
Softwa
re via
the
Network
1
Press
JJ,/T
on
the
Man
u
al
Update screen
to
select
"Network
Update", and then press
ENTER.
• The
lV
conn
ec
ts to the network and ch
ec
ks for
updates.
• To
canc
el
,
pr
ess ENTER.
Connectmg
to
lntBrnet
Check1ng
for
the
l
ates
t
software
ve-rs1on
Access1
ng
~
2
The
current
ver
sion
of
the
lV
a
nd
th
e
latest
version
of
software are displayed.
To
update
the
1V
software,
sel
ect
"Yes",
and then press
ENTER.
•
When a
se
rver
co
nnec
ti
on ca
nn
ot be
estab
li
shed
or an
update is not
avai
lable,
a m
essage is
displayed.
If
a server
co
nnection cannot be estab
li
shed,
che
ck
the broadband connection and
Internet
Setup.
Cannot reach
the
server
Check
the
netwo
rk
senmgs
and
try
agam
....
The
TV
does
not need
to
be
updated
....
® -
30
3
After
the
update
file
is
downl
o
ad
ed, the software
update
process begins.
•
Upda
ting
to
the
latest
sottwa
re
..
Update
Version
xxxxxxxx
IIIHIIIII
50%
Remote control
ope
ration is
disab
led
dur
ing
update
process.
A
Do
not
unplug
AC
cord.
WiUD
•
Do
not
unplug
the
AC
cord
while
the
software
is
being
updated.
4
When
the
so
ftw
are is su
cc
essfully
upd
ated
, a
screen is
disp
layed
indi
ca
ting
th
at the up
dat
e
proce
ss
is
com
pleted.
A
sc
reen
in
dicating that the u
pd
at
e is
co
mpleted
is displ
ay
e
d.
4 se
co
nd
s
later, t
he
lV
restarts
a
ut
omati
ca
lly.
Software
update
1s
com
plete
Update
Verston
X)()()()(
X)()(
• If
the
so
ftw
are was not updated success
fully,
check the broadband connection
an
d
In
te
rn
et
Se
tup, and then t
ry
updating the software aga
in
.
fa1
led
to
complete update
Please
retry from Software Upda1e menu
....
Enjoying
30
Image
Viewing
(for
the
LE857U,
LE757U,
LE755U
and
LE657U
mode
l
s)
You
ca
n use
spec
ial
30
Glasses
to
watch
3
D-
s
upp
orted i
ma
ge
s on this
1V
.
•
You
can
e
nj
oy
30
movies
on
this
lV
by viewing
th
e movie through
SHARP 30 Glasses suppl
ied
with the
lV
or
through
op
tional 30 Gl
asses
sold separately.
•
To produce
30
images,
li
quid crystal
sh
utters in the
30
Glasses alternately
ope
n and
clo
se
imperceptibly
fast to
exactly
m
atch
alternati
ng
left
and
right video images
displayed
by t
he
lV
.
•
Not
all
consumers
can
experience
an
d
en
joy 3
DlV
.
Some peop
le
suffer from stereo b
li
ndness
which prevents
them from perceiving the
in
tended depth of
30
entertainment.
Also, some
people
who watch
30
programming
may exper
ien
ce
initial f
ee
li
ng
s
of motion sickness
as
th
ey
ad
just
to
t
he
picture.
Others
m
ay
e
xpe
ri
ence headaches,
ey
e fatig
ue
or motion sickness.
Some
viewers might
also
expe
ri
en
ce
epileptic
seizures. Uke a
ro
ll
er
coaster, the
experience is not for ev
ery
one.
@it.ll•
•
The
3D
Glasses
are precision
equipment.
Handle
the
m
with
care
.
•
Improper
use
of
the
3D
Glasses
or
failure
to
follow
th
ese
instructions
can
result
in
eye strain.
•
If
you
experience
dizz
iness, nausea,
or
other
discomfort
while
viewing 3D
images
, immediately
discontinue
use
of
the
3D Glasses.
Using
the
3DTV
with
incompatible
3D
broa
d
casts
or
software
ca
n
make
images
appear
blurry
or
create
overlapping
images.
•
When viewing
3D
images continuously,
be
sure
to
take
a
break
periodically
to
prevent eye strain.
•
If
you are nearsighted
or
farsighted
or
have
astigmatism
or
a
different
level
of eyesight
between
t
he
left
and
right
eyes,
you
should
take
the
necessary
steps,
such
as
wearing
eyeglasses,
to
correct
yo
ur
eyesight
before
viewing 3D
images
. The
3D
Glasses
can
be
worn
over
eyeglasses.
•
When viewing
3D
images,
keep
the
3D
Glasses
horizontally
level
with
the
TV
sc
reen.
If
you
ti
lt
the
3D
Glasses
with
respect
to
the
TV screen,
the
images
viewed
by
the
l
eft
and
right
eyes
may
appear
significantly
different
or
images
may
appear
overlapping.
•
View 3D
images
at
the
appropriate
distance
from
the
TV screen. The
recommended
distance
is
th
r
ee
times
the
effective
height
of
the
TV
screen.
Examples
of
recommended
distances
70-inch screen: Approx. 8.5
ft
(2.6
m)
60-inch
screen: Approx. 7.2
ft
(2.2 m)
Viewing
should
not
be
done
closer
than
the
reco
m
mended
distance.
•
Be
careful
of
your
surroundings
when
viewing
3D
images. When you vi
ew
3D images,
objects
may
appear
closer
or
farther
than
they
are.
This
may
cause
you
to
misjudge the di
stance
and
possibly
res
ult
in
injury
if
you
accidentally
hit
the
screen
or
surrounding
objects.
• The 3D
Glasses
are
not
recommended
for
people
aged
less
than
6.
•
When
children
are
viewing 3D images,
be
sure
a
parent
or
guardian
is
presen
t.
Monitor
children
vi
ewing
3D
images
,
and
if
they
show
signs
of
discomfort
,
immediately
discontinue
use
of
the
3D
Glasses.
• People
with
a
known
history
of
photosensitivity
and
people
with
heart
proble
ms
or
poor
healt
h
sho
uld
not
use
the
3D
Glasses.
This
can
worsen
existing
health
conditions.
•
Do
not
use
the
3D
Glasses
for
other
purposes
(such
as
general
eyeglasses,
su
nglasses,
or
protect
i
ve
goggles).
•
Do
not
use
the
3D
function
or
3D
Glasses
while
walking
or
moving
around.
Th
is
may
result
in
injuries
d
ue
to
running
into
objects
,
tripping,
and/or
falling.
•
When using
the
3D
Glasses,
take
care
not
to
accidentally
strike
the
TV
scree
n
or
other
people. Vie
win
g
3D
images
may
cause you
to
misjudge
the
distance
to
the
TV screen and
acc
identally
strike
the
sc
reen,
resulting
in
possible
injury.
•
It
is
recommended
that
you
do
not
view
3D
images
if
you
are
sleep deprived
or
if
you have
bee
n d
rinki
ng
alcohol.
Page 33
Enjoying
30
Image Viewing (for the LE857U, LE757U, LE755U and LE657U models)
Display Methods for
30
and
20
Images
~
';
;
,,,..,,.,.,
J"r
'HB'!
'
c,
<
l'~lr'
2D--+ 3D
[QJ
• Converts normal 2D images into
30
images.
[[g
• Creates 3D images from 3D images displayed side by side.
3D mode
Side by Side
The image
is
split into a left and right image, and then the
(using
the
images
are
stretched and displayed sequentially
to
create
3D Glasses)
a 3D image.
[][]
• Creates 3D images from 3D images displayed on t
he
Top and Bottom
top
and
bottom. The image
is
split into a top and bottom
.
im
age, and then the images are stretched and displayed
sequentially
to
create a 3D image.
Side
by
Side
--+
[[g
• Creates 2D images from 3D images displayed side by side.
20
mode
20
O
nl
y the left image
is
stretched and displayed. The image
(without
does not appear
in
30.
using the
Top
and
Bottom
[][]
• Creates 2D images from 3D images displayed on t
he
3D Glasses)
--+
20
top
and
bottom. Only the top image is stretched and
-
displayed. The image does not appear in
30.
Viewing
30
Images
• The
1V
screen may temporarily become black when
the
1V
is trying
to
detect a
30
image signal and when
switching from
30
to
20
mode.
The image
signal
may contain a
30
identification
signal. You can enable
the
1V
to
automatically
detec
t
the
30
image
type
by
selecting "Sys
tem
Options"
>
"30
Setup" >
"30
Auto
Change" on
the
1V. (See
page
32.)
1
When
"3D
Auto
Change"
is
set
to
"Mode
1"
or
"Mode2"
• The 3D image type is detected automatically and
the a
pp
ropriate 3D image is displayed.
When
"3D
Auto
Change"
is
set
to
"Off"
I
• The following message is displayed. Press
30
.
3D
p
1cture Is detect
ed
Po
wer
on
the
3D
glasses.
(N
eed
to wear the
3D
glasses to wa
tch
3D picture)
• Press
.,..;~
to
select the "Yes", and then press
ENTER.
2 Turn on
the
30
Glasses and place
them
on your
head.
3 You can
now
view
30
images.
4 Press
3D
during
the
30
mode.
Select "Yes"
and
press
ENTER
to
swi
tch
to
20
mode.
• Take off the
30
Glasses and turn off the powe
r.
5
Ta
ke
off
the
30
Glasses and turn
off the
powe
r.
• If the input signal switches to
20,
2D images are
displayed
au
tomatically.
•
30
mode is canceled automatically when the setting is
changed, input
se
lection is changed, or the power is
turned off.
1 Press
3D
.
• A screen appears prompting you to sele
ct
between
30
and
20
image viewing.
2 Press
<0111/~
to select "30 "
or
"20"
, and then
press
ENTER.
•
To
view
in
30
mode
: Select "
3D
",
and then
go
to
step 3.
• To view
in
2D
mode: Select "2D", and then
go
to
step
6.
3 Press
<0111/~
to sel
ect the
30 sign
al
type
("2
0-->30
",
"Side
by Side
" or "
Top and
Bottom")
and
then
press ENTER.
LEJ
m~
20
-'>
30
S1
de
bv
Side Top
and Bottom
• If you select t
he
same system
as
that of the input
signal, 30 images are displa
ye
d.
4 T
um
on the
30
Glasses and place
them
on your
head
.
5
You
can
now view
30 images
.
6 Press
.,..;~
to
select
the
20
signal ty
pe ( "S
ide
by
Side"
or
"Top and Botto
m") and then
press
ENTER.
• If you select the same syst
em
as
that
of
the in
put
signal, 2D images are displayed.
• Take off the 3D Glasses and turn off the power.
7
Take
off
the
30
Glasses
and
tum
off
the
powe
r.
®-
31
Page 34
Enjoying
3D
Image Viewing (for the LE857U, LE757U, LE755U and LE657U models)
You
can
convert
normal20
images
into
30
images.
1 Press
30.
2 Press
<1111/~
to
select "20--->30",
and
then press
ENTER.
3 Turn on
the
30
Glasses
and
place
them
on
your
head.
• The
TV
returns to 2D mode after 1 hour has passed.
You can switch
back
to the previous mode by pressing
30.
1 Press
30.
• A confirmation screen
is
displayed.
2 Select "Yes"
and
then press ENTER.
• The
TV
returns to the previous mode.
Pressing
30
in
30
mode
displays
the
3D
menu.
Press
the
colored
buttons
to
make
the
necessary
settings.
A:
3D Brightness Boost
(for the LE857U, LE757U and LE755U models)
B:
3D Surround
(See
page 23.)
The surround mode changes each time
you
press
B.
C:
2D-->3D
Convert Effect
0:
3D Setup
®-
32
Configuring the TV Settings to
Enhance
3D
Image Viewing
You can
adjust
the
3D
image
to
the desired image
quality
and
make
various settings
for
30
image
viewing.
• Set
AV
MODE
and
"30
Brightness Boost" with
"Picture Settings".
• Set
the
30
viewing settings with "System Options"
>
"30
Setup".
• Which items can
be
selected/adjusted differs
depending on whether the
TV
is
in
2D
mode or
in
3D
mode.
The audio
and
video settings can
be
changed
to
suit
the
program
or
input
content
being
watched.
STANDARD(30): For a highly defined image
in
a
normal lighting.
MOVIE(30): For a movie.
GAME(30): Lowers image brightness for easier
viewing.
• You can select
AV
MODE by pressing AV
MODE
on
the remote control unit.
You can
adjust
the
backlight
of
the
TV
for
30
image
viewing.
High/Middle/Low: Select a desired
level
of
3D
Brightness Boost.
• When "High" or "Low"
is
selected, "OPC", "Backlight"
and "Range of OPC" are not available.
You can
make
various settings
to
enhance
3D
image
viewing.
3D
Aut~
Change
This setting
can
be
used
to
switch
to
30
mode
automatically
when a 30
identification signal
is
detected.
Set
the
desired
mode
according
to
the type
of
media
you are viewing, such as video from a connected
device
or
video
from an internet application.
Mode
1:
3D mode
is
selected automatically when a
3D signal
is
detected while viewing video from a
VOD
service or HDMI-connected equipment.
Mode
2: 3D mode
is
selected automatically when,
in
addition to detecting a
3D
signal
while viewing
video from a
VOD
service or HDMI-connected
equipment, a video pattern with "Side by Side" or
"Top and Bottom" format
is
also detected.
Off: Auto change
is
not performed.
• This function does not work when the input source
is
Composite, Component, RGB or Analog/Digital tuner.
ao••Oepth•CPI'I'I:toJ
Select
the
method
for adjusting
the
3D depth.
Auto: The depth
is
adjusted automatically.
Manual: You can manually adjust the depth using
the function "Depth Change".
• This function
is
only available when the input signal
is
3D.
• This function may not be displayed depending
on
the
type of 3D signal.
Depth Change
Adjusts
the
depth
manually. "0"
is
the level where no
adjustment is made.
• This function
is
only available when "3D Depth Control"
is
"Manual".
2D--t3D Convert Effect
You
can
adjust
the
30
effect when converting
images from
20
mode
to
30
mode.
Select a desired level
of
convert effect
from
+ 1
to
+16.
• This function
is
only available when converting 2D
images to 3D images.
• When you use this function, image conversion
on
the
TV
will result
in
some differences
in
the original images
and how they appear.
• 2D images that have
been
converted to 3D images
may be viewed only for personal
use.
Viewlo9Time••tofo
This displays
the
elapsed time
of
30
image viewing.
Yes: Displays the elapsed viewing time on the screen
every hour.
No: Does not display the elapsed viewing
t1me.
3D
Test
This displays
30
images for testing the
30
operation.
Clicking "Start" on
the
screen plays
back
3D
test
images.
•
If
you press RETURN during playback, the previous
screen
will
be displayed.
3D
Glasses Control
To
enable this function, set
"TV
Location"
to
"Store".
Selecting "Yes" prevents
the
30
Glasses from
receiving 3D signals from other TVs.
Page 35
Enjoying
3D
Image
Viewing
(for
the
LE857U,
LE757U,
LE755U
and
LE657U
models)
lmD
•
Appropriate 3D Glasses are required
to
view 3D images. Purchase 3D Glasses for
use
with
Sharp
brand
3D
LCD
1Vs.
•
30
Glasses
lenses
•
Do not apply pressure
to
the lenses of the 3D Glasses. Also, do not drop
or
bend the 3D Glasses.
•
Do not scratch the surface
of
the lenses
of
the 3D Glasses with a pointed instrument or other object. Doing so may
damage the 3D Glasses and reduce the quality of the 3D image.
•
Use only the cloth provided with the optional 3D Glasses
to
clean the lenses.
•
Caution
during
viewing
•
Do not use devices that emit strong electromagnetic waves (such as cellular
phones or wireless transceivers)
ne
ar
the 3D Glasses. Doing
so
may cause the 3D Glasses
to
malfunction.
• The 3D Glasses cannot
ope
rate
fully
at extreme high
or
l
ow
temperatures. Please use them within the specified
usage temperature range.
• If
the 3D Glasses are used in a room
with fluorescent
lighting
(60
Hz),
the light within the room may appear to flicker.
In
this case, either darken
or
turn off the fluorescent lights when using the 3D Glasses.
•
Wear the 3D Glasses correctly.
3D
images will not be
cor
rectly visible if the
30
Glasses are worn upside down
or
back-to-front.
• Other
displays (such as computer screens, digital clocks, and calculators) may appear dark and difficult
to
vi
ew
while wearing the
30
Glasses.
Do
not wear the 3D Glasses when watching anything other than
3D
images.
• If
you lie on your side while watching the
lV
with
3D
Glasses, the picture
may
look dark
or
may not be v
is
ible.
•
Be sure to stay within the viewing angle and optimum
lV
viewing distance when watching
30
images. Otherwise,
you may not be able
to
enjoy the
full
3D
effect.
• The 3D Glasses may not
work
properly
if
there is any other 3D product
or
electronic devices turned on near the
glasses
or
1V
.
If
this occurs, turn off the other 3D product
or
electronic devices
or
keep the devices as far away as
possible from the
30
Glasses.
• Stop
using the 3D Glasses in any
of
the following
situations:
- When images consistently appear doubled while you are wearing the
30
Glasses
- When you have difficulty perceiving the 3D effect
• If
the 3D Glasses are faulty
or
damaged, stop using them immediately. Continued use
of
the
3D
Glasses may
ca
use
eye fatigue, headaches and
illness.
• If
you have any abnormal skin reaction, stop using the
3D
Glasses.
In
very rare instances, such reactions may be
due
to
an
allergic
reaction
to
the coating or materials used.
• If your nose
or
temples become red or you experience any pain or itchiness,
stop
using the 3D Glasses. Pressure
caused by long periods
of
use may lead
to
such reactions and may re
su
lt in skin irritation.
•
Usage
range
of
the
30
Glasses
•
The 3D Glasses can be used
by
receiving a signal sent from the
lV.
The 3D Glasses tum off automatically
after 15 seconds if
no
signal is recieved fro m the
lV.
Operating range:
From directly
in
front
of
the
30
emitter on the
1V:
approx. 17 ft
(5
m)
(within approx.
30°
horizontally and
20° vertically)
•
For further details, refer
to
the
operation manual of your
3D
Glasses.
Enjoying Photo/MusicNideo
Playback
You
can
connect
the
1V
to
a
US
B
memory
device
,
USB
hard
dr
i
ve
or
home
net
work
(DLNA) server
to
enj
oy
viewing p
ictu
res, listening
to
music,
and
watching
videos.
• Depend ing on the
USB
memo
ry
device/USB
hard drive/home net
wor
k (DLNA} server, the
lV
may not be able to
recognize the recorded
da
ta.
• It
may take time
to
read the recorded data
if
the
USB
memory
devi
ce
/USB hard drive
/hom
e network (DLNA) server
contains many files or
fo
lders.
•
Use only alphanumeric
characters for naming files.
•
Fi
le names over
80
characters (may vary depending on charac
te
r set) may not be display
ed
.
Connecting a
USB
Memory Device/USB Hard Drive
Inse
rt
the
USB
memory
dev
i
ce
with
recor
ded
photos
,
mus
ic or v
ideos
into
the
USB
1
or
USB
2
te
rm
i
na
l on
the
1V.
• If
USB
memory
devices
are inserted in
to
bo
th
te
rminals, t
he
U
SB
1
ter
minal
has
pr
iori
ty
.
•
Wh
en
connecting
a
USB
hard drive,
be
sure
to
us
e a h
ard
d
ri
ve w i
th
an
AC
adap
ter.
•
Do
no
t
rem
ove
a
USB
memory
dev
ice
or
memory
ca
rd
fr
om
the
1V
while
transferring files, using
th
e s
lide
sh
ow
func
ti
on,
or
switching
screens,
or
bef
ore
you
exit
"USB
"
from
the
INPUT list.
•
Do
not
i
ns
ert
and
remove
a
USB
me
mo
ry
device
/
USB
hard
dr
i
ve
to
and f
rom
the
1V
re
pea
te
dly.
•
When
usi
ng
a
card
reade
r, be sure
to
insert a
USB
memo
ry
device
first.
•
USB
input
cannot
be
selected
when
displaying t
he
b
rowse
r. C
lose
t
he
br
owse
r firs
t.
Wii'
i
iloldl
•
Do
not use a
USB extension cable when connecting a
USB
memory device
to
the USB
terminal on the TV.
•
Using a
USB
extension cable with the USB
memory device
may
prevent the TV from performing correctly.
®-
33
Page 36
Enjoying Photo/MusicNideo
Playback
Connecting a Home
Network
(DLNA) Server
Connect
the
1V
to
the
hom
e
network
(DLNA
)
se
Ne
r using
an
ETHERNET
ca
ble.
•
You
can
also
connect
a
Home
Network
(DLNA
) s
eNer
by
using
a wireless LAN.
1
~
.. -
-
-
~-
·
Home network
(DLNA
)
serv
er
Router
I
I
I
_
_J
• Do not disconnect a home network (DLNA) se
Ne
r from
th
e
TV
while
transferring f
il
es,
wh
en a
sc
reen is switching to
another or before you exit
"Home
Ne
tw
o
rk
(DLNA
)"
from
th
e
INPUT
list.
•
Do not connect and disconnect a home network
(D
L
NA)
server from the TV repeatedly.
Selecting the Folders to Play Back
•
To
play
back
data
on
a
USB
memory
device,
insert
the
USB
memory
device
on
the
1V.
USB
mode
is
selected
automatically.
(G
o
to
s
tep
2)
•
Use
the
follo
wing
procedure
to
swit
ch b
ac
k
to
USB
mode
after
switching
from
USB
mode
to
anoth
er
mode.
1
Select
"USB"
or
"Home
Network
(DLNA)"
fr
om
INPUT
list screen.
2
Press
D.
3
Press
JJ..
IT
(or
<1111
/
111>-
)
to select
the
dri
ve/
se
N
er
where
you
want
to
find y
our
files,
and
then
pre
ss
ENTER.
•
For
USB
mo
d
e,
select the driv
e.
•
When
in
DLNA mode, select the server.
4
Press
<1111/111>-
to
select
"Photo",
"Music"
or
"Video",
and
then
press
ENTER.
5
Press
<1111/111>-
to
select
the
desired folder,
and
then
press
ENTER.
® -
34
•
The Media screen can be displayed even by using the
application window. To
di
splay the app
li
ca
tion wind
ow
,
press
SmartCentral.
(Se
e
page 16.)
•
You cannot switc h the input m
od
e if a
USB
memory
device is not
co
nnected.
•
You
do
not need
to
select the
dr
ive/server in step 3
when there is
o
nl
y
one drive in the connected
USB
memory devi
ce
or
there
is
only
one home network
(DLNA) server
connected
to
the
TV.
•
16
is the maximum number of
USB
dr
ives and 1
0
is
the maximum number
of
home ne
tw
ork (DLN
A)
servers
that can be displayed.
• If
th
e TV is turned off and then on again, the n
umb
er
assigned to the
USB
drive
ma
y c
ha
n
ge
.
• "VIEW MODE"
is fixed during the Photo
or Music
mode. During
"Video mode",
you c
an
select
"Auto"
or
"Original
".
•
The key guide
di
sp
lay
disappears automatica
lly
after a
particular time
ha
s elapsed. To display t
he
key guide
display again, press
DISPLAY.
device
Fi
le
system
Photo
file
format
M
us
ic
fi
le
format
USB
Memo
ry
,
USB
ca
rd reader (Mass
Storage
class),
USB
hard
dr
ive
FAT/FAT32/NTFS
(USB
hard
dr
iv
e only)
JPEG (.j
pg
)
(DCF2.0
compliant)
Multi-Picture For
ma
t
(.
rnp
o)
(C
IPA
DC-
007
Comp
liant)
MP Type : Multi vi
ew
i
nd
ividua
ll
y image
(stereoscopic view)
MP3
(.
mp3)
Bitrate: 32k,
40k,
48k,
56k
, 64k, 80k ,
96k,
11
2k
, 128k,
16
0k
, 192k, 224k,
256
k, 320kbps
Samp
li
ng
frequency: 32k, 44
.1
k,
48kHz
VIdeo
file
fonnat
e~
•
Container
VIdeo
Di
vX
3.
11
/
4.
x/5.1/
6.
0
MP
3
.avi
AVI
Xvi
D
Dolby Digital
H.264
LPCM
M
PEG
4
ADPCM
Motion Jpeg
DTS
.mkv
MKV
DivX 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0
M
P3
XviD
Dolby D
igi
tal
H.
26
4
LPCM
MPEG4
ADPCM
D
TS
DivX 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0
MP3
.
as
f
ASF
.wmv
XviD
Dolby
MP
EG4 Digital
VC-1 LPCM
Win
dows
Me
dia
Vi
deo
v9
WMA
MP3
.mp4 MP4
.m
ov (SMP4)
H.264
Do
lby
Digit
al
MPEG4 Dolby
Mo
tion Jpeg Digit
al
Pl
us
AAC
.mpg
PS
.mpeg
MP
EG
2
Dol
by Digital
M
PEG
1
M
PEG
L
PC
M
•
Progressive format jpeg files are not s
up
ported.
• USB
1
.1 devices may n
ot
be
played properly.
•
Operation u
sing
USB
hubs is
not guaranteed.
• Some video file
formats
ma
y not be play
ed
depending
on the
f
il
e.
• Some
images
ma
y n
ot
be
displayed
in
th
e a
pp
ropriate
aspect ratio depending on the file format.
I
;HmJ
:ta>N·I
ij
ii·
1
!~Mti4s!t:Ji
~
Photo
file
format J
PEG
Music
file
format LPCM,
MP3
Video
file
format
MP
EG2-PS, MPEG2-TS,
WMV,
A
SF
,
MP
4,
MOV, AVI
•
Pro
gr
essi
ve
fo
r
ma
t jpeg
fil
es
are not supported.
•
So
me
vi
deo file forma
ts
may not be played depend
in
g
on
the file or t
he
seN
e
r.
•
WMV,
ASF,
MP
4,
MOV
and
AVI are
non-DLNA
contents.
Page 37
Enjoying Photo/MusicNideo Playback
Playing
Back
Files
on a
USB
Memory
Device/Home Network (DLNA)
Server
CD
•
The screen images in this section are for the
USB
mode.
It
may be
slightly different in the Home network
(DLNA) mode.
Example
Buttons
for
thumbnail operations
Buttons'
F
2
C
·
·
~ptl()!'f
:
w
.A.I~
/
~1
...
Select
a desired item .
ENTER
When
selecting
a
folder
icon:
Enter this directory.
When
selecting
a photo
thumbnail:
Enlarge
the photo.
RETURN
Return
to
the previous proces
s.
A(red)
USB
mode:
Select
the images
to
be
displayed.
Press
this button
to
add or remove a
~~~~~~~~~--------------------
Home Network
(DLNA)
mode:
Display
the Media screen.
B (green)
Display
the
music
list
screen.
You
can
select the background music
to
be
played for the
slide
show.
C
(blue)'
Start
the
slide
show.
D
(yellow)
Display the
USB
MENU/Home Network
(DLNA) Menu screen.
*
This function is
available only
for the
USB
mode.
mm
•
When there are inv
al
id
photo
files,
the
X
mark will
be
displayed for the
fi
l
e.
(USB
mode only
.)
•
The icon
@QJ
appears on the
thumbnails
of
3D
images.
(USB
mode
only
.)
- For the LE857U, LE757U, LE755U and LE657U
models
If
you
do
not switch
to
3D
mode for the 3D images,
they will
be
displayed
in
2D.
- For the LE650U, C7500U
and
C6500U
mo
dels
3D images
are
always displayed
in 2D mode.
• You
can see the
fi
le
name, shooting date,
f
il
e size and
pixel
size
of
the
selected
photo in the
lower-left
co
rner
of the screen (shooting date
is
only available
in
the
EXIF
file
format).
•
·
Vi~Yiiitg
lndiVidyal
PhptOs
.
The
photo
selected
on
the
thumbnail
selection
screen is displayed.
Buttons
for
individual display operation
. Blrttons
,
,,
.,
.,
···
..
~~c~J)tion
..
;
,,
~~
...
Go
to
the previous/next photo in
th
e
same directory.
RETURN
Return
to
the
thumbna
il
selection
screen.
3D*
Switches
between
2D
and
3D
modes.
A(red)
Rotate the photo by
90
degrees
to
the
left.
B
(green)
Rotate the photo by
90
degrees
to
the
right.
*This
function is av
ai
lable for the LE857U, LE757U,
LE755U and LE657U
models.
mm
•
Rotating photos
only applies
to
the
temp
orarily
selected
item and this setting is not saved.
•
In
3D
mode, you cannot rotate the photos. (For the
LE857U, LE757U, LE755U and LE657U
models)
•
The key guide
display
disappears
automatic
all
y
after a
particular time has elapsed.
To
display
the key gui
de
display
again, press
DISPLAY.
o.
SI~ShQ¥.,
The
photos
displayed
on
the
thumbna
il
selection
screen
are
displayed
as
a
sli
de
show
.
Buttons
for
slide
show
operation
,
,
~o~
"
,,
,.:
~~
.. ,
ii
.:
~nPiJc,n
r;,
.
:.
},;;;
..
RETURN
Return
to
the
thumbna
il
selection
screen.
3D*
Switches
between 2D and
3D
modes.
D
(yellow)
Display the USB
MEN
U/
Home Network
(DLNA) Menu screen.
*Th
is function is
available
for the LE857U, LE757U,
LE
755U a
nd
LE657U
models.
JZm)
•
The
selected
BGM is
played repeatedly.
•
The
slide
sh
ow
continues
until
you press
RETURN.
•
For setting the slide
show
speed,
select "Select Slide
Show Interval"
on the
USB
MENU
/Hom
e
Ne
twork
(DLNA) Menu screen.
•
The key guide
display
disappears
automatically
after a
particular time has
elapsed.
To
display
t
he
key guide
di
sp
lay
again, press
DISPLAY.
·usij.
Menij.
On
the
menu
to
be
displayed
in
USB
mode,
use
J;/T
to
select
an
item
and
make
settin
gs
to
yo
ur
preferences.
Example
U
SB
MENU
;
~Sli
d\!SOOWlrit""'al
•
(10Se<;l
Se
lect Sli
de
Show
BGM
Se
t
All
Shde
Show
Image
Reset
AU Shde
Sho
w
Image
R
emove
USB
De1nce
•aD
Display
(for
the
LE857U,
LE757U,
LE755U
and
LE657U
models)
You
ca
n
view
photos
in
3D
.
E)
• You can
select
"3D
display"
from
"USB MENU" only
when the
thumbnails
screen for the photo
mode
in
USB
mode is
displayed
on the screen.
•
Depending on the
file,
the photos
ma
y not
be
displayed
in
3D.
•
Select
Slide
Show
Interval
Specify
the
length of time
be
fore the next image appears.
Press
JJ..
/T
to
se
l
ec
t
t
he
des
ir
ed
le
ngth
of
th
e ti
me
,
and
th
en
press
ENTER.
5sec/10sec/30sec/60sec
rm
•
For DLNA mode,
fo
ll
ow
th
e same procedu
re.
•
Depending on the pho
to
fi
les,
t
he
length
of the slide
show
interval
may differ from
the
selected Interval
tt
me.
•
Select
Slide
Show
BGM
Th
e m usic
li
st
screen
appea
rs
when
you
select
"
Se
l
ec
t Slide
Sh
ow
BGM
".
You
can
select
the
musi
c
to
be
played
in
the
ba
c
kground
while
th
e
slide sh
ow
is
being
displaye
d.
1
Select
the music you want
to
play
from the music
list.
•
For o
pe
rations on
th
e music li
st
sc
ree
n,
see
"Music Mode".
2
Press
RETURN
to
dis
play
t
he
thumbnail
se
lection
sc
reen, a
nd
then
pr
es
s
C
to
start
the
sli
de
show
and
th
e
backgro
und
mus
ic.
mii)
•
Al
l
of
the music files
are
selected
by default.
•
Set/Reset
All Slide
Show
Image
Selecting
"Se
t All Slide
Sh
ow
I
mage"
or
"Reset
All Sli
de
Show
Image
" will
di
splay
the
thumb
nail
select
ion
screen.
On
t
he
s
cree
n,
set
or
r
eset
t
he
images
to
be
disp
la
yed
in t
he
slide
show
.
Set
All
Slide Show Image:
Checkmarks are added
to
all
the images.
Reset
All
Slide Show Image:
Removes
all the
checkmarks fr
om
all
t
he
images.
•
Remove
USB
Device
To
re
move
the
USB
de
vi
ce
pr
operly
,
use~
/
.,.
to
se
l
ect
"Y
es"
and t
hen
pr
ess
ENTER.
(@-
35
Page 38
Enjoying Photo/MusicNideo
Playback
..
~
Example
·
-·
-
~'
~
-
-·
.,
.....,,
IIi
: :
··~
• I
• I
• I
• I
Buttons
for
music
mode
Buttons
Description
11./"fl
....
/
...
Select
a desired item.
ENTER
When selecting a folder icon:
Enter this directory.
When selecting a music file:
Play
music.
RETURN
Return to the previous process.
A(red)
USB
mode:
Select
the music to be played back.
Press
this button to add or remove a
checkrnark.
-----------------------------
Home Network
(DLNA)
rnode:
Display the Media screen.
B (green)
Stop
music.
C (blue)
Play/Pause
music.
D
Display the
USB
MENU screen.
(yellow)*
*This
function
is
available only for the
USB mode.
•
When there are invalid music files, the
X
mark
will
be
displayed for the file.
(USB
mode only.)
•
The displayed play time may differ slightly from the
actual play time depending on the files.
®-
36
USB Menu
On
the
menu
to
be
displayed
in
USB
mode,
use
J;../T
to
select an item
and
make
settings
to
your
preferences.
Example
Reset All
Auto
Play
Remove
USB
Dev1ce
*
See
page 35 for details
on
the Remove
USB
Device
function.
•
Set/Reset
All
Auto
Play
Selecting "Set All
Auto
Play"
or
"Reset All
Auto
Play"
will
display the music list screen.
On
the screen, set
or
reset
the
music
to
be
played
back
in
the
slide show.
Set
All
Auto
Play:
Checkrnarks are added
to
all
the
music files.
Reset
All
Auto
Play:
Removes
all
the checkmarks
from
all
the music files.
Video Mode
Example
1iif
-·
.,
_,
~
-
-·
.,.
_,
.
:
:
..~
• I
• I
'"
I
..
I
Buttons
for
file selecting
operations
Buttons
Description
~IT/
....
1 ...
Select
a desired item.
ENTER
When selecting a folder icon:
Enter this directory.
When selecting a music
file:
Play
the
video.
RETURN
Return to the previous process.
A(red)
USB mode:
Select/deselect items (checkmarks are
_a_9_9~9
_t<?
~~~
~~l~t~9
~t~~-s2.
________
Home Network
(DLNA)
mode:
Display the Media screen.
D
Display the
USB
MENU screen.
(yellow)*
*
Th1s
function
1s
available only for the
USB
mode.
IDD
•
The key guide display disappears automatically after a
particular time has elapsed. To display the key guide
display again, press
DISPLAY.
Buttons
for
playing
mode
Buttons
Description
~
Go to the beginning of a file by pressing
once or to the previous file by pressing
twice.
"'
Go to the next
file.
...
USB mode:
The fast forward speed changes every
time you press
.,.
. After playing to the
end, the
1V
goes to the next file and
_s~c:r!s_
~o
_r~l~~·
___________________
Home Network
(DLNA)
mode:
Jump forward
in
a video. *3
....
USB
mode:
The reverse speed changes every time
you press
.....
After going back to the
beginning, the
1V
starts to play the
same file.
-----------------------------
Home Network
(DLNA)
mode:
Jump back
in
a video.
*3
ENTER
USB
mode:
Pause the video.
-----------------------------
Home Network
(DLNA)
mode:
Play/Pause
the video. *3
RETURN
Go back to the file selection screen.
3D
*1
Switches between 2D and 3D modes.
A (red)
*2
Jump to the scene where playback
was last stopped.
B (green)
Stop
a video.
C(blue)
Display the USB/home network
(DLNA)
operation
panel.
D
Display the
USB
MENU screen.
(yellow)*2
0-9*2
Jump to a point
in
the video during
playback
of
a
file
without chapters.
You
can jump to a later point by
pressing a higher number.*4
*1
Th1s
function
1s
available for the LE857U , LE757U,
LE755U and LE657U models.
*2
These functions are available only for the
USB
mode.
*3
Jump forward/back and play/pause may not be
available depending on the files.
*4 During playback
of
a file without chapters, playback
points are set automatically.
Playback
points
are set
at intervals of a one-tenth
of
playback time.
Example for a file with a playback time of 1
00
minutes:
Pressing
1
jumps 1
0 minutes forward, and pressing
2
jumps
20
minutes forward.
Pressing
0
returns to the start
of the file being played back.
USB
Menu
On
the
menu
to
be
displayed in
USB
mode,
use
~IT
to
select an item
and
make
settings
to
your
preferences.
Menu
for
file selecting operations
Example
USB
MENU
Reset
All Auto Play
Remove
USB
Dev1ce
*
See
page 35 for details on the
Remove
USB
Device
function.
•
Set/Reset
All
Auto
Play
Selecting
"Set All
Auto
Play"
or
"Reset All
Auto
Play"
will
display
the
video list screen.
On
the
screen, set
or
reset
the
video
to
be
played
back
in
the
slide
show.
Set
All
Auto
Play:
Checkmarks are added to
all
the
video files.
Reset
All
Auto
Play:
Removes
all
the checkmarks
from
all
the video files.
Menu
for
playing
mode
Example
USB
MENU
*
See
page 35 for details
on
the Remove USB
Device
function.
• Title
(Edition)/Chapter
Selecting
"Title (Edition)"
or
"Chapter" will
display
a list
of
titles/chapters
contained
in
the
video file.
Select
the
title
or
chapter
you
want
to
play back.
•
The selected title
or
chapter
is played back.
•
"0-9"
is displayed
for
files
without
chapters.
Playback
jumps
to
the
playback
point
of
the
selected number.
lmD
• If
there
is
Edition information, this screen
is
displayed
when the title
is
selected.
• If
there
is
no title or edition, you cannot select
"Title
(Edition)".
• "Chapter"
cannot be selected when there
is
no
chapter.
•
Show
Video
Information
The information
of
the
current
file is displayed.
Page 39
Enjoying Photo/MusicNideo
Playback
.
USB
Operatipg
Panel/Home
tf4!tt\YOf'k
: (Dt.NI\)
C)pe~~ion,:
Panel · · ·
You
can
use
the
operation
panel for video
playback
operations.
You
can
call
up
this operation
panel
from
"System
Options">
'View
Option".
Example
11:1
....
·.~
II
......
-
•
ce
-
-
"'""'
Buttons
for
using the
USB
operation panel
..
Hold
down
to
go
in
reverse.
....
Starts playback.
~
Hold
down
to
fast forward.
.....
Video without chapters:
Press
once to
return to the previous
playback point.*
Pre
ss
twice
to
return to the previous
file.
Video
with chapters:
Press
once
to
return to the previous chapter.
Press
twice
to
return to the previous
file.
II
Sets pauses and
sti
ll
pictures.
~
Video
without chapters:
Press
once
to
advance to the next
playback point.*
Press
twice
to
display
the next
file.
Video
with chapters:
Press
once to
advance to the next chapter.
Press
twice to
display
the next
file.
Audio Change the audio when
multiple
audio is
available
for the video you are
watching.
•
Playback
stops.
cc
Change the
Closed
Caption
display.
Title
Displays
the title
(ed
ition).
Resume
Jump
to
the scene where
playback
jump
was
last
stopped.
* Dunng
playback
of a
file
w1thout
chapters,
playback
points
are set automatically.
Pla
yback points are set at
intervals
of
a one-tenth
of
playback
time.
Example
for a
file
with a
playback
time
of
100
minutes:
Playback
points
are
set every 1
0
minutes.
Pressing
~
one time after viewing the
file for 15 minutes
jumps to the 20-minute
playback point.
•
Reverse/fast forward continues from one
file
to another
during continuous
playback.
•
Use
"CC"
on the operation
panel
to
change the
Closed
Caption
display. You can
also
switch the
Closed
Caption
display
by using "System
Options" >
"Vi
ew
Option" > 'Change
CC"
or by pressing
CC
on the
remote
control
unit.
•
Use
"Audio"
on the operation
panel
to
change the
audio.
You
can
also
switch the audio by using
"S
ystem
Options"
>
'View Opti
on
"
>
"Change Audio".
Buttons for using
the
Home
Network
(DLNA)
operation panel
....
Starts
playback
.
.....
Go
to the
beginning
of a
fi
le
by
press
i
ng
once or to
the
previous
file
by pr
essing
twi
ce.
II
Sets pauses and
still
pictures.
~
Go
to
the next
file.
•
Pla
yback
stops.
(\
Jump back
in
a video.
(\
Jump forward
in
a video.
o~vx-setup
This is the function
to
confirm
your
registration
code.
You need
to
register
the
code
at
http://www
.divx.
com.
1
Press
MENU
to
display
the
MENU
screen.
2
Press
<IIJ
/
..,.
to
se
lect "Initial
Setup
",
and
then
press
ENTER.
3
Press
JJ..
I
'Y
to
select "Div)(i'
Setup
",
and
then
press
ENTER.
8 Divx«' VOD
Registration
You can find your registration
code
on
this menu.
You need
to
register t
he
TV
at
http
:
//www
.divx.com
before playing the DivX content.
• Divx«' VOD
Deregistration
You can find
your
deregistration
code
on t his menu.
You need
to
deregister the
TV
at
http
:/
/
www.d
ivx.
com
to
release
the
registration.
rm
• This function is
available only
for
the
USB
mode.
•
This function
may
no
t
work
while
an
Internet
application
is being used.
Playing
Back
Files
from a
Portable
Device or PC
With
the
remo
te
playback
func
tion,
you
can
use your
portable
device
to
play
back
pictur
es
, video, and
music
on
the
h
ome
network
server.
•
This
TV
is a
DLNA
ce
rtified Digital Media Renderer.
(DMR)
•
To
use
the
r
emo
te
playbac
k
function, your
portable
devi
ce
must
be
a
DLNA
Certified Digi
ta
l Media
Contro
ll
er.
• A
wireless
a
cc
ess
point
is required to use a
portable
de
vice.
Set
Up
Home Network
Make the settings
for
r
emote
pl
aybac
k.
1
Press
<IIJ
/
..,.
to
select
"Initi
al
Setup",
and
then
press
ENTER.
2
Press
JJ..
/
'Y
to
select
"Intern
et
Set
up"
,
and
the
n
press
ENTER.
3
Press
JJ..
/
'Y
to
select
"Set
Up
Ho
me
Netwo
rk
",
and
then pr
ess
ENTER.
4
Press
JJ..
I
'Y
to
select t
he
spec
ific adjustment
item, and then
press
ENTER
to
set each item.
8
Remote Control
Play
Settings
This setting
a
ll
ows
the
TV
to
perform remote
playback.
Permitted/Not allowed
8 Timeout Setup
This sets the
time
until
the
TV
returns automatically
to
TV
mode
after
remote
pl
ayback
ends.
10 sec./60
sec./No
•
This functi
on
ma
y
not
work
wh
ile an Internet
application is being used.
•
For
in
fo
rmati
on
on
the
compa
tible f
or
mats, see
"Home
Network
(DLNA)
Se
rv
er
Compa
tibility" on
page 34.
@-
37
Page 40
Other Viewing Options
Presetting Remote Control Function
You can
operate
the
connected
AV
products
(AV
receiver,
cable
box,
SAT
tuner, DTV, VCR, BD, DVD,
LD)
using
the
presetting
manufacturer
function
of
your
remote
control
unit.
POWER
El
DISPlAY(~~~~
Eli!
CJ
TV
STB
DVtH'CR
AUDIO
CJ
Eli!
Elil
Eli!
..
II
CJ
CJ
CJ
CJ
• ~ eREC
CJ
CJ
CJ CJ
OPTION
SLEEP
AUDIO
FREEZE
CJ
CJ
CJ CJ
Presetting manufacturer codes
1 Press an
appropriate
button
(STB,
DVD•VCR
or
AUDIO)
to
operate
the
connected
equipment.
2 Press
an
appropriate
button
(STB,
DVD•VCR
or
AUDIO)
and
DISPLAY
at
the
same
time
to
enter
the
code
registration
mode.
3 Press 0--9
to
enter
the
manufacturer
code.
• Preset mode
is
finished once the
LED
no longer
lights up.
4 After registering
the
code,
the
LED will
stop
blinking
then
turn
off
after
one
second.
(If you
perform
an
incorrect
operation,
the
LED will blink
quickly
then
turn
off.)
®-
38
Manufacturer codes
STBBRAND
REMOTE CONTROL
CODE NUMBER
ANVISION
04,05
CABLE STAR
04,05
DISH
NETWORK
39,40
DIRECTV
41
EAGLE 05
G.INSTRUMENT
02,03,
10,
11,17,20
GERROLD
17
JERROLD
02,03,
10,
11,
12,20,
25-34
MAGNA VOX
04,05,08,
12, 15, 16,
18,19,22,23
MOTOROLA 38
OKASIGMA
07
PANASONIC
14,21
PHILIPS
04,05,08,
13,
15,
16,
18,19,22,23
PIONEER
07
RANDTEK
04,05
RCA
14,
36*,
37*
S.ATLANTA
01,09,24
VIEWSTAR
04,05,08,
13, 15, 16,
18,19,22,23
ZENITH
06,35
• Numbers marked
with*
are SAT codes,
all
others are
STB codes.
BD/DVD/LD BRAND
REMOTE CONTROL
CODE NUMBER
DENON
24
JVC
31
KENWOOD 36
MAGNA
VOX
26
MARANTZ
26
MITSUBISHI
28
PANASONIC 24,37
PHILIPS
26,38
PIONEER
30,33,35
PROSCAN
25
RCA
25,39
SAMSUNG 29,34
SHARP
23,32,41,42
SONY
27,40
TOSHIBA
26
YAMAHA
24
ZENITH
26
• Depending on the brand, the codes of some BD
players may not be supported.
VCR BRAND
REMOTE CONTROL
CODE NUMBER
AUDIO DYNAMICS
09
BROCKSONIC
13
CANON
04
CRAIG
12
CURTIS MATHIS
04
DBX
09
EMERSON
10, 13,
14
GE
04
INSTANT REOLYA 04
JCPENNEY
04
JVC
09,
16,
17,
22
KENWOOD
09
MAGNA
VOX
04,05,06
MAGNIN
12
MEMOREX
04
MONTGOMERY WARD
02
NEG 09
PANASONIC
04,
18, 19,
20,
21
PENT
AX
05
PHIL CO
04,05
PHILIPS
04,05,06
QUASAR
04
REALISTIC
01,02
SAMSUNG
11,
12
SHARP
01,02,03
SONY
07,08,15
SYLVANIA
04,05,06
TATUNG
09
TEAC
09
TMK 10
YAMAHA 09
AUDIO BRAND
REMOTE CONTROL
CODE NUMBER
SHARP
01
SHARP (SOUND
BAR)
02
Page 41
Other Viewing
Options
Operating the Connected Equipment
To
operate
the
connected
equipment,
press
STB,
DVD•VCR
or
AUDIO
to
select
your
device.
(STB
(cable/satellite
set-top
box),
BD,
DVD,
VCR
or
AUDIO.)
The
remote
control
un
it
button
will
function
as
follows.
•
When
you
operate
VCR,
DVD
or
BD,
press
INPUT
to
select
the
terminal
connected
to
your
device.
•
CABLE
and
SAT
cannot
be
selected
at
the
same
time.
2
--7.--==...:::;-
~-=::=~-7
3 8
4 9
5
10
6
I!;.Y:
-i
l-----i+-12
r-------;:==~-13
1
POWER (SOURCE)
•
Turns the
co
nnected equipment power on and off.
2~
• Starts
playback.
(VC
R, BD, DVD)
3
....
•
Rewinds the tape and
allows
picture search.
(VCR)
• Hold
down
to
go
in reverse. (BD,
DVD)
4.
• Stops
the
tape transport.
(VCR)
•
Playback stops wh
en
pressed. With some Blu-ray
disciDVD players, pressing the
butto
n twice may
open the disc tray. (BD, DVD)
5
.....
•
Pressing
quickly
once takes you
to
the start
of
the
chapter currently playing.
Each time you press
it, you move
back
to
the start
of
the previous
chapter. (BD, DVD)
6
Q-9, •
(DOT)
•
Press a button (
or
buttons) that
co
rresponds to
the channel
that
you wish
to
watch.(STB)
7~
•
Rap
id
ly
advances the tape and allows
p
icture search.
(VCR)
• Hold
down
to
fast forward. (BD, DVD)
811
• Sets
pauses and
still
pictures. (VCR, BD,
DVD)
9
.....
•
Pressing
qu
ic
kly
once
takes you
to
the start
of
the
next chapter. Each time you press it, you move
ahead
to
the start
of
the next chapter. (BD,
DV
D)
10
eREC
• Starts
recording.
(VCR)
11
FLASHBACK
•
Press
to
sw
i
tch
be
tween the current channel
and the
cha
nnel
you were watching immediately
before. Some
manufacturers
do
not
preset
FLASHBACK. (STB)
12
CH/VV
•
Press
CHI\
or
CHV
to
tune
in
to
a higher
or
lower channe
l.
(STB)
•
Press
to
select
the channel
of
the TV tuner
on
the
VCR.
(VCR)
13
MENU
•
When this button is pressed, the BD/DVD menu
will
display. (BD, DVD)
14
.IT/~
/
~,
ENTER
•
•IT
I
~
~
...
:
Press the button
to
select items on
the
STB GUIDE
screen
or
STB
MENU screen.
(STB)
Press the button
to
select
items
on
the BD
/D
VD
menu screen. (BD,
DVD)
•
ENTER
:
Press
to
activate the selected function.
(STB,
BD,
DVD)
Using AQUOS LINK
Controlling
HDMI
Equipment Using
AQUOS
LINK
What's
AQUOS LINK?
•
Us
ing the
HDMI
CEC (Consumer
Electron
i
cs
Contro
l)
protocol,
with
AQUOS LINK you can
in
ter
ac
tively
operate
compa
tible system equipment
(Bi
u-ray disc equipment, AV
amp
li
fi
er
, DVD).
•
By
connecting
AQUOS LINK-compatible
devices with HDMI
-c
ertified
cables
to
the TV,
yo
u can
control
a recorder
or
AV
amp
lifier
using
the
remote
control
of the
TV
.
• AQUOS LINK allows
you
to
operate the
HDMI-connected
equipment with one remote
control.
C,otm~
AaUoS
.
BD
.,..yer
via
AQUOS
UNK·coinpatlble
audio
sylstem
· ·
Example
HDMI-certified cable
..
HDMI-certified cable
•
• Use
HDMI IN
1
to
connect
ARC-c
omp
atible ecuipment.
~
,_
..
(_
·-
)
~
AQUOS
BD player
AQUOS
LINK-compatible
audio
system
Back
panel
horizontal inputs
Back
panel
vertical inputs
maD
•
For connecting
the
TV
to
AQUOS LINK-compatible
equipment, use
commercia
ll
y available cables.
•
Point the rem
ote
control toward the TV, n
ot
to
connected
HOM I
equipment.
•
Video noise may
occur
depending on the type
of
HDMI
cab
le
used. Make sure
to
use an HDMI-certified
cable.
•
Up
to
3 pieces
of
HDMI
recordi
ng
equipment
and
one AV
amplifier can
be
connected
us
ing this system.
•
These operations affect
the
HOM I equipment selected as the curre
nt
input source.
If
the equipment does n
ot
operate,
tu
rn
on
the equipment and
se
l
ect
the appropriate i
npu
t source using
INPUT.
•
The
AQUOS LINK
feature may not operate properly when an
HDMI splitter
or
AV sel
ector
unit is used. These
de
vi
ces
may cause interruptions
to
the image
and/or
sound.
Connected
AQUOS LINK-compatible
devices can
be
operated with
out
changing the settings
of
the remote
co
ntrol
unit.
The
OPTION
button will
function
only
when
AQUOS LINK
is used .
• One
Touch
Play
While
the TV is in standby mode, it
automatically
turns
on and
plays
back
the
image from the
HOM I
source.
• One
Touch Recording
Press
eREC
while you are viewing a broadcast received with the
AQUOS LINK-c
ompa
tible
r
ec
order. The
AQUOS
LINK automat
ic
ally recognizes the connected
HDMI
device and starts recording.
• Single
remote control
The
AQUOS LINK automatically
recognizes the
con
nected HOM I
device and you can control
the
TV
and the
de
vices
as
if using a universal remote
control.
• Control
the
AQUOS LINK-compatible
audio system
Set the
vo
lume
of
AOUOS LINK-compatible
audio system.
•
The above description is
an
example
of
the
AQUOS LINK functi
on
.
•
The steps in
"AQUOS
LINK
Setup"
on
page
40
need to
be
comp
leted
bef
or
ehand.
•
Refer
to
th
is
ope
ration manual
and the operation
manual
of
the
AQUOS LINK
device
to
be
used with this TV.
®-
39
Page 42
Using
AQUOS LINK
Make
the
settings
to
use
AOUOS
LINK.
Set
the
settings
with
"System
Options">
"AQUOS LINK
Setup".
For
operating
the
on-screen
display
menu,
see
page
20.
AQUOS
LINK
Control
Select AQUOS LINK Control
to
disable
the
AOUOS
LINK function even
when
an
AQUOS LINK-
compatible
HOM I
device is
connected
to
the
TV. This
function prevents
the
device f
rom
starting
to
operate
unexpectedly.
Auto
Power
On
If
this
is
activated,
the
One
Touch
Play
function
is
enabled. While
the
TV
is
in
standby
mode,
it
automatically
turns
on
and
plays
back
the
image
from
the
HDMI source.
Selectin'{l
R~ofder
·
When
multiple AQUOS
LINK-compatible
devices
are connected, this function
allows
you
to
set
the
recorder
for
recording
when
you press
eREC
on
the
TV
's
remote
control
unit.
Press
J;/T
to
select
the
recorder
for
recording.
ChanneiSeJect
Key
This function can
be
set
for
each input
terminal.
The
remote
control unit
of
the
TV
can
be
used
to
select
the
channel, display
program
information,
and
perform
other
operations
of
the
connected
AOUOS
LINK-
compatible
equipment.
®-
40
Audio
RebimCflan~•
This function
allows
you
to
listen
to
the
TV audio via
audio
equipment
without
using an
optical
fi
ber
cable,
which
conventionally is required.
Requirements
for
using an
ARC-compatible
AV
amplifier:
• ARC-compatible
AV
amplifier
connected to the
ARC-
compatible HDMIIN terminal (HDMIIN
1)
.
(Refer
to
the operation manual
of
the
ARC-compatible
equipment for details.)
•
Use
of
an
ARC-compatible cable.
Auto:
You
can list
en
to
the
TV
audio with
ARC-
compatible
audio equipment.
Off:
This function does not work.
1m
• If the
TV
audio cannot be output from the
AV
amplifier
even
after making the necessary settings, connect the
TV
to the AV
amp
li
fier
with an
optical
fiber cable
and
select "Off".
AQUOS LINK allows
you
to
operate
the
HDMI-
connected
equipment
with
one
remote
control.
Press
.,.
to
start
playing
back
a
title.
•
The
last played
program is
played bac
k.
You
can use
the
following
buttons during broadcast viewing.
,. :
EJUttt)ns
.•
.. :
;
i.'
i
l
l~:;.·
.
·+
:')L
i'
'.
POWER
Turns the power
of
the
HOM
I
connected
(SOURCE)
devices on and off.
....
Hold
down this button
to
go
in
reverse .
~
Starts
playback.
~
Ho
ld down this button to fast forward .
•
Stops
playback.
II
Sets pauses and
still
pictures.
Press
ing
quickly
once takes you
to
the
....
start of the chapter
currently playing.
Each time you press it, you move back
to
the start of the prev
iou
s chapter.
Pressing
quickly
once takes you
to
the
~
start of the next chapter. Each time you
press i
t,
you move ahead
to
the start
of
the next chapter.
1m
•
The buttons
14111
1
~
do
not function with the
following Blu-ray
disc
players currently
avai
lable.
-
BD-HP20U, BD-HP50U
This function
allows
eas
y
one-touch
recording of the
program being
viewed
on the
TV
to
AOUOS LINK-
compat
ible
equipment
with a r
eco
rding function
by
simp
ly
pressing
eREC
on
the
r
emote
control.
Prepare
the
connected
AQUOS LINK-
compatible
recorder for recording. Check the
following
items.
•
Make sure that
the antenna
cable
is connected.
• Check that there is sufficient
available space on the
recording media
(HOD,
DVD,
etc
.).
• On
the
TV,
use
"AQUOS LINK
Setup" and
"Se
lec
ti
ng
Rec
order"
to
select
the equipment for recording.
• By
default,
the recorder connected
to
HOM
IIN
1 is
selected
f
or
recording.
1
Press
eREC
to
start
re
cording.
•
When you are viewing a broadcast received with
the AQUOS LINK-compatible
recorder
se
lected
in
"Selecting
Recorder
",
recording to the
AQUOS
recorder
of
the broadcast being viewed starts.
•
When you are viewing a broadcast received
with equipment other than the AQUOS LINKcompatible recorder
selected
in
'Selecting
Re
corder"
or
other
external
input equipmen
t,
pressing
eREC
on the remote
control
does not
start recording.
2
Use
the
Link
Operation
Menu
to
stop
recordi
ng
.
G)
Press
OPTION
to
display
the Link Operation
Menu screen.
®P
ress
J..
/T
to
select "Stop
Recording",
and
then
press
ENTER.
Link Operation Menu
The Link Operation Menu
allows
you to
ma
ke
adjustments
dur
i
ng
ope
ration
of
AQUOS LINK-
compatible
equipment.
1
Press
OPTION
to
display
the Link
Operat
ion
Me
nu.
2
Press
• IT
to
sel
ec
t
t
he
desired item,
and
the
n
press
ENTER.
•
Specific operations differ depending on the item
you
select. Following
are
the basic operations for
each item.
Recorder
Power
On/Off :
r;:ljl
. ·
Yo
u
can
manually
tum
on
/
off
the
power
of
the
connected
AQUOS
LINK-compati
ble
eq
uipment.
Each
time
you
press
ENTER,
the
connec
t
ed
e
quipment
swi
tch
es
on
or
off
.
Page 43
Using AQUOS LINK
You
can
use
the
device operation panel
to
control
playback operations.
Press
J;/T
I~~~
to
select
the
desired operation.
am
•
This function works only when
AQUOS LINK-
compatible equipment with the Device
Operation Panel
function
is
connected.
This function
allows
you
to
display
the
title list
for
the
connected equipment
and
to
play
back
the
title
you
want
to
enjoy.
Before using this function.
Power
on
the
AQUOS
LINK-compatible equipment,
and
select
the
appropriate external input.
Select the title with
J•/T
I~~~.
and
then press
~
to
start playback.
ED
•
This function works only when
AQUOS
LINK-
compatible equipment
is
connected.
You can call
up
a
setup
menu
from
the
connected
AQUOS LINK-compatible equipment.
liD
•
Depending
on
the status
of
the equipment (recording
or in standby mode, etc), the setup menu
will
not be
displayed.
•
The
setup menu
will
not
be
displayed with the player
BD-HP20U
currently availabl
e.
You
can
switch the
media
(HOD
or
DVD)
for
playback
or
recording on
the
AQUOS
LINK-compatible
recorder.
•
The
Media type toggles each time you press
ENTER
in
"Change Media
of
Device".
You
can
call
up
the
AOUOS
LINK-compat
ible
recorder's
EPG
and
preset timer recordings using
the
TV's
remote
control.
Select
the
program
on
the
recorder's
EPG.
•
You
can use
.
I
T
/
~
1
~.
ENTER. RETURN.
EXIT
and the colored buttons.
miD
•
This function works only when
an
AQUOS
LI
NK-
compatible recorder is connected.
•
Refer
to
the operation
manual
of
the recorder for
details.
You
can select
to
listen
to
the
TV
sound only from
the
AOUOS
LINK-compatible audio system.
By
AQUOS
audio SP:
The sound from the
TV
speaker
is
muted and only the sound from the
AQUOS LINK-compatible audio system
is
audible.
o
You
can use
VOL+/-
and
MUTE.
By
AQUOS
SP:
The
sound
is
output from the
TV
speaker.
You
can
manually
change
the
AQUOS AUDIO
speaker
system's
sound
mode.
The
sound
mode
changes each time you press
ENTER.
•
Refer to the operation manual
of
the
AQUOS LINK-
compatible audio system for details.
If
multiple
HDMI
devices are
connected
in a daisy
chain,
you
can
specify which device
to
control here.
Press
• IT
to
select
the
desired device
from
a list
of
connected
HDMI
devices,
and
then press
ENTER.
You
can
also display
the
AQUOS LINK
Setup
screen
from
the
Link
Ope
rati
on
Menu.
Sta
rt/
Stop
Record
'
c
.=
. ·
You
can
also
use
the
Link Operation Menu
for
recording
on
the
connected AOUOS LINK-
compatible equipment.
o
You
can also start recording by pressing
eREC
on the
remote control unit.
Using a Smartphone with the TV
This
fun
ct
i
on
enables you
to
connec
t
the
TV
to
a
smartphone
that
supports Mobile Hi
gh
-Def
inition Link
(MHL
TM)
using
an
MHL
cable.
To
connect
the
TV
to
your
MHL-c
ompat
ible smartphone,
be
sure
to
use an
MHL
cab
le (
commerc
ia
ll
y
available).
• You can view pictures and video on a lar
ge
screen.
• You can play
back music
files
.
IDD
Back
panel
vertical inputs
•
An MHL-co
mp
atible portable device is required
to
use this functio
n.
Connect t
he
device to the
HDMIIN
4 termina
l.
•
This product incorporates MHL 1.
•
Auto Power
On
When an MHL-
co
mpatible
de
vice is connected to
the
TV
, the TV turns on automaticall
y.
o
This function operates when
"AQ
UOS LINK
Contro
l"
is
se
t to
"On
".
(See
page 40.)
•
Auto
Input Selection
When an MHL-compatible
de
vice is connected while t
he
TV is on, the input mode
is
select
ed
automatically.
o
Th
is
function operates when
"AQUOS LINK
Control" is set to
"On".
(See
page 40.)
• Operation Using
the
Remote
Control
The remote control of the TV can
be
used to operate a portable device.
• . IT I
<111
!
~,
ENTER,
EXIT,
0-9,
o
(
DOl)
,
ENT,
etc.
o
The operations vary depend
in
g on the connected equip
me
nt and content being viewed.
®-
41
Page 44
Using a PC
Adjusting the PC
Image
You
can
adjust
the
position
of
the
image
input
from
a
PC
the
settings
with
"System Options"
>
"Terminal
Setting">
"PC
input".
Auto
,Sync;
(for
Analog
PC
,Input
Mode
Only)
For
automatically
adjusting the
PC
image.
Yes:
Auto Sync.
starts and "Now adjusting the
image."
displays.
No:
This function does not work.
r:mD
•
When "Auto
Sync."
is
successful,
"Completed"
displays.
If
not,
"Auto Sync." failed.
• "Auto Sync."
may
fail
even
if "Completed"
displays.
•
"Auto
Sync."
may
fail
if the computer image has
low
resolution, has
unclear (black)
edges, or
is
moved
wh
il
e
executing "Auto
Sync.".
•
Be sure
to
connect the
PC
to
the TV and switch it on
before starting "Auto
Sync.".
.
Fine'
Sync.
Ordinarily
you
can easily adjust
the
picture as
necessary
to
cha
nge
image position using
"Auto
Sync.". In
some
cases, however, manual
adjustment
is
needed
to
optimize
the
image.
H-Pos.:
Centers the image by moving it
to
the
left
or
right.
V-Pos.:
Centers the image by moving it up
or
down.
Clock:
Adjust when the image fiickers with vertical
stripes.
Phase:
Adjust when characters
have
low
contrast or
when the image flickers.
•
For resetting
all
"Fine Sync."
adjustment items
to
the
factory preset
values,
press
JJ..I'f
to
select "Reset",
and then press
ENTER.
• It
is not necessary
to
adjust the
"Clock"
or
"Phase"
when a
digital signal
is
being input,
so
it cannot
be
selected.
•
The
default
cursor position may not be in the
ce
nter,
because the screen position
variable
ranges may be
asymmetrical.
•
The screen position
variable
ranges depend on the
View Mode or the
signal
type. The ranges can
be
seen
on the position-setting screen.
@)-
42
Setting
Audio Input
This function sets the terminal to output the computer
audio.
The adjustment items vary depending
on
the input
source.
Select
the input source corresponding
to
the
terminal connected to
the
PC
and
then adjust the
desired item.
To
perform t
he
operation, refer
to
"System Options"
>"Terminal
Sett
i
ng">
"Audio
Sele
ct".
.PC
IN
Video:
Select
th
is when the TV and
PC
are
connected usi
ng
an analog RGB
cab
le
and the
audio is not
inp
ut.
Video+Audio:
Select
this when the TV and
PC
are
connected
us
i
ng
an
analog
RGB cable
and the
audio is input v
ia
a
0
3.5
mm
stereo minijack.
.HDMI2
HDMI(Digital):
Select
this when the TV and
PC
are
connected using an HDMI-
ce
rtified
cable
and
audio is input v
ia
the same
cab
l
e.
HDMI+Analog:
Select
this when the TV and
PC
are
connected usi
ng
a
DVI-HDMI
conversion cable
and the audio
is
input via a
0
3.5 mm stereo
minijack.
1m
•
When "Audio Select" is set
to
"HDMI(Digita
l)",
sound
will
not be produced if you use
only
an
HDMI-certified
cable
to
connect
HD
MI-compatible
equipment. To
produce sound, you
should
make an
analog
audio
connection.
• If
you want to connect HDMI-compatible
equipment
using
only an HDMI-certified
cable,
set
"Audio Select"
to
"HDMI(Digital
)".
Control of the
TV
•
The TV
ca
n
be
controlled
from
a
PC,
con
tr
ol panels
and
other
devices using
the
RS-232C
or
IP.
•
Use a cr
oss
-type
RS-232
C
cab
le, ETHERNET
cable
(commercially
available) or wireless LAN
for
the
con
nections.
•
This operation system
should
be used by a person
who is accustomed to using computers.
-
AQUO$
Remote
Control
.
Set
this fun
ct
ion when operating the
TV
from equipment
connected
by
LAN
or
wireless LAN.
To
perform the
operation, refer to
"Initial Setup"
> "Internet Setup".
• AQUOS
Remote
Control
When
"AOUOS
Remote
Control"
is selected,
"Chan
ge
" will
be
highlighted.
Press
ENTER.
• Detailed
Settings
Make the detailed settings (
Lo
gin
1
0,
passwor
d,
et
c.
).
Follow
the
on-screen instructions
to
configure the
settings.
Set the
name
of
the
TV
displayed on
other
n
etwork
devices.
•
Use
the software keyboard to set the name. See
page
45 for
details on the software keyboard.
TCP/IP
Set the
IP
address on the
TV
menu
None
(Do
no
t
select
Telnet
or
SSH)
Set
a port number on the TV
menu
(Con
tr
ol
port)
When
you
set your
ID
and password on the
TV
menu, you
need to enter them as soon
as
you connect
to
t
he
TV.
1m
•
When you use this function, make settings for
"AQUOS
Remote
Control".
•
The connection
will
be cut off when there has been no
communication for 3 minutes.
Co
.
m:rnurlicatiOI"!
Con~itiohs
for
RS-232C
Set
the
RS-232C
com
mun
i
cat
ion setti
ngs
on the
PC
to
ma
tc
h the
TV's
com
mu
ni
cat
ion
con
ditions.
The
TV
's
commun
i
cat
i
on
settings are as
follows:
Baudr&te: .. •
9,600
bps
Data
kl!1gth:
8 bits
.Paritymt
None
StOP
mt:
. .
1 bit
•
Communication procedure
Send
the
contro
l
co
mman
ds
from
th
e
PC
via
the
RS-
232C
or
IP.
The
TV
operates
acco
rding
to
the receiv
ed
co
mm
and
and
sends
a
response
mess
age to
th
e
PC
.
Do
no
t send
mu
ltiple
co
mmands
at
th
e
same
time.
Wait until the PC
rece
ives the
OK
re
spons
e
befo
re
send
i
ng
the
ne
xt
co
mman
d.
•
Command
fonnat
E
ig
ht
ASC
II
codes
+
CR
I
c
1
I
C2
I
C3
1
C4
1
P1
I P2 I
P3
I
P4
1
_!
I
~
Command
4-digits
Pa
rameter
4-d
igits
Re
tu
rn
co
de
Co
m
mand
4-digits: Comman
d.
The
tex1
of
fo
ur
character
s.
Parameter
4-d
igi
ts:
Pa
rame
ter 0-9,
x,
blank
,
?
•Parameter
I
npu
t
the
parameter values,
al
igning left, and
f
ill
with
bl
ank
(
s)
fo
r
the
remainde
r. (Be sure
tha
t 4
va
lu
es
are
input
for
the
pa
r
ame
t
er
.)
When
th
e
input
para
me
t
er
is not within an
ad
ju
stab
le
ra
nge
, "ERR"
returns. (Ref
er
to
"Respon
se
code
fo
rmat".)
Any
numerical
va
l
ue
can
replace
the
"x"
on
the
t
ab
le.
0
I
Whe
n
"?"
is in
put
for
s
om
e
c
omm
ands, t
he
pr
ese
nt
I
0
I
0
0
9
se
tt
i
ng
?
va
lue
I
I - I
3
0
r
es
po
nds
.
?
? ?
?
I
•
Response code fonnat
No
rm
al
response
I
0
I K
I...J
I
"--.;--"
Return
code
(ODH)
Pro
blem
r
esponse
(
com
muni
ca
t
io
n
erro
r or
in
cor
rec
t
command
)
E R
R I ...J I
"--.;--"
Re
t
urn
code
(ODH)
Page 45
Using a PC
•
Command
table
•
Commands
not
indicated
here
are
not
guaranteed
to
operate.
CONTROL
ITEM
COMMAND
PARAMETER
CONTROL
CONTENTS
POWER
ON
COMMAND
R s
P:W
o:
Off
The
Power
On
command
rejected.
SETTlNG
1:
On
[RS-232C]
The
Power
On
command
accepted.
2:
-
On[IP]
The
Power
On
command
accepted.
POWER
SETTING
p
0
W'R
o:
Power
Off
n
shifts
to standby.
1:
Power
On
Power
On
INPliT
TOGGLE
I T G D
X!
- - -
(Toggle)
It input-switches
by
the toggle. (It
is
the
same
as
SELECTION
en
input change
key)
1V I T v D
0'
- - -
It input-switches to 1V.
(A
channel
remains
as it
is.
(Last
memory))
1-8 I A v D
- - -
1:
HDMIIN
1,
2:
HDMIIN
2,
3:
HDMIIN
3,
4:
HDMIIN
4,
5:
COMPONENT
IN,
6:
VIDEO
IN
1,
7:
VIDEO
IN
2,
8:
PC
IN
AV
MODE
SELECTION
A v
T
-
0:
(Toggle),
1:
STANDARD
(ENERGY
STAR),
Although
it
cen
choose
now,
it
is
toggle operation
2:
MOVIE,
3:
GAME,
4:
USER,
5:
DYNAMIC
(FIXed),
in
inside.
6:
DYNAMIC,
7:
PC,
8:
x.v.Color,13:
VINTAGE
8,
13:
For
the
LE857U, LE757U,
LE755U
end
MOVIE
14:
STANDARD(3D),
15:
MOVIE
(3D),
C7500U
models.
16:
GAME
(3D),
100:
AUTO
14,
15,
16:
For
the
LE857U, LE757U,
LE755U
end
LE857U
models.
VOLUME
v 0 L
:M
Volume
(0-1
00)
POSmON
H-PD51TlON
H
p
o:s
-
The
screen
position
variable
ranges
depend
on
V-POSITION
v
p
o:s
the
Vew
Mode
or
the
signal
type.
The
ranges
-
cen
be
seen
on
the
position-setting
screen.
CLOCK
c L
c:K
-
Only
PC
mode.
(D-180)
PHASE p H s:E
Only
PC
mode.
(D-40)
VIEW
MODE
w I
D'E
- -
0:
(Toggle)
[AV],
1:
Side
Bar
[AV],
2: S.Stretch
(AV]
0:
Although it
cen
choose
now,
it
is
toggle
3:
Zoom
(AV],
4:
Stretch
(AV,
USB-Vtdeo,
DLNA-
operation
in
inside.
Video
or Internet applications], 5:
Normal
[PC]
1 :
Only
available
when 4:3
signal
is
being
input.
6:
Zoom
[PC],
7:
Stretch
(PC],
5,
6:
Only
available
when 4:3
signal
is
be01g
8:
Dot
by Dot
[PC]
(AV],
9:
Full
Screen
(AV]
input.
10:
Auto
(USB-
Video,
DLNA-Video
or Internet
8:
[PC]
Available
except
when
UXGA
is
being
input.
applications],
(AV]
Only
available
when 1080ilp
is
being
input.
11:
Original
[USB-
Video,
DLNA-Video or Internet
9:
Only
available
when
720p
is
being
input.
applications]
10, 11:
Available
when
USB-
Video,
DLNA-Vtdeo
or
Internet
application
is
used.
MUTE
M u T
E
0:
(Toggle),
1:
Qn,
2:
Off
SURROUND
A
c s u
.
For
the
LE857U,
LE757U,
LE755U
and
LE857U
- - -
' '
models:
0:
(Toggle),
1:
Normal,
2:
Off,
4:
3D
Hall,
5:
3D
~~'~'~~~~~.-~:_~~-~<!i~~----------
'
i
For
the
LE850U,
C7500U
and
C6500U
models:
0:
(Toggle),
1:
On,
2:
Off
AUDIO
SELECTION A c:H
A X
-
(Toggle)
SLEEP
TIMER
0
FlT:M
- -
-
0:
Off,
1:
OFF
TIMER
-30MIN.,
2:
OfF
TIMER-
BOMIN.,
3:
OFF
TIMER-
90
MIN.,
4:
OFF
TIMER -120
MIN.
CHANNEL
DIRECT
D
C!C'H
-
The
channel
number
of
1V
An
input
change
is
included
nit
is
not
1V
display.
CHANNEL
(1-135)
In
Air,
2-69ch
is
effective.
(ANALOG)
In
Cable, 1-135ch
is
effective.
DIRECT
D
Ai2
p
.
(01
00-9999)
DIGITAL
Air
(Two-Part
numbers. 2-digit plus
CHANNEL
2-digit)
(DIGITAL)
D
c:
2
u
. .
(1-999)
DIGITAL
Cable
(Two-Part
numbers,
3-digit
plus
-
3-digit)
Front
han
of
DIGITAL
CABLE
CHANNEL
NO.
(Designate
major
channel)
D
c:
2
L
-
(D-999)
DIGITAL
Cable
(Two-Part
numbers,
3-digit
p..,
3-digit)
Rear
han
of
DIGITAL
CABLE
CHANNEL
NO.
(Designate
ITW1or
channel)
CONTROL
ITEM
COMMAND
CHANNEL
DIRECT
DiG!
1
0
CHANNEL
(DIGITAL)
D!C!
1
1
CHUP
ClHlU
p
CH
C!H!D
w
DOWN
cc
C! L !C
p
DEVICE
NAME
TiViN
M
MODEL
NAME
M'N:R
D
SOFTWARE
VlEASION s W'V
N
IPPROTOCOL I
p p
v
VlERSION
3D
T D C H
AEMOTIE
CONTROL
A c
K
y
BUTTONS
ID
PARAiMETIER
X
X
X
1
1
CONTROL
CONTENTS
(D-9999)
(D-6383)
The
channel
number of
1V
+ 1
The
channel
number
of
TV ~ 1
(Toggle)
DIGITAL
Cable (One-Part numbers, 5-digit, less
than 10,000)
DIGITAL
Cable (One-Part numbers, 5-digit,
more
then 10,000)
n
~
is
not 1V display,
~will
input-switch to 1V.
(same
function
as
CHI\)
nit
is
not 1V display, it will input-switch to 1V.
(same
function
as
CHV)
Toggle
ope<ation
of a closed
caption.
The
devica
name
set
in
'1V
Name
Setting"
is
displayed.
The
model
name
of the
1V
The
current
version
of
the 1V
software
is
displayed.
The
currently
supported
version
of
IP
protocol
is
displayed.
0:
3D
Off,
1:
2D~3D,
2:
SBS,
3:
TAB,
4:
3D?2D
This
control
item
is
available
for
the
LE857U,
(SBS),
5:
3D--+2D
(TAB),
6:
3D
auto,
7:
2D
auto
LE757U,
LE755U
end
LE857U
models.
D-9:
0-9,
10:
DOT,
11:
ENT,
12:
POWER,
58:
For
the
LE857U,
LE757U,
LE755U
end
13:
DISPLAY,
14:
POWER
(SOURCE)
15:
....
LE857U
models
16:
~.
17:
H>.
18:
II.
19:~
,
20:
••
21:~
,
22:
eREC,
23:
OPTION,
24:
SLEEP,
27:
CC,
28:
AV
MODE,
29:
VIEW
MODE,
30:
FLASHBACK,
~~:
~~.~:
Y~~.::
~~~u:
~:'~~raJ.
40:
ENTER,
41:.6.,
42:l',
43: ... , 44:
...
,
45:
RET1JRN,
46:
EXIT,
47:
FAVORITE
CH,
49:
AUDIO,
50:
A (red),
51: B (green),
52: C (blue),
53:
D
(yeliow),
54:
FREEZE,
55:
FAV
APP
1,
56:
FAV
APP
2,
57:
FAV
APP
3,
58:
3D,
59:
NETFLIX,
80:
AAL
•
If
an
underbar U appears
in
the
parameter
column,
enter a space.
•
If
an
asterisk
(*)
appears,
enter a value
in
the
range
indicated
in
brackets
under
CONTROL
CONTENTS.
•
Any
numerical
value
can
replace
the
"x"
on
the
table.
PC Compatibility Chart
It
is
necessary
to
set
the
PC
correctly
to
display
XGA
and
WXGA
signal.
Resolution
Horizontal
Vertical Frequency
VESA Standard
Frequency
720x400
31.5
kHz
70Hz
0
VGA
31.5
kHz
60Hz
0
640x480
37.9
kHz
72Hz
0
37.5
kHz
75Hz
0
35.1
kHz
56Hz
0
SVGA
800x
600
37.9
kHz
60Hz
0
48.1
kHz
72Hz
0
46.9
kHz
75Hz
0
48.4
kHz
60Hz
0
XGA
1024 X 768
56.5
kHz
70Hz
0
60.0
kHz
75Hz
0
WXGA
1360 X 768
47.7
kHz
60Hz
0
SXGA
1280 X 1024
64.0
kHz
60Hz
0
SXGA+
1400 X 1050
65.3
kHz
60Hz
0
UXGA
1600 X 1200
75.0
kHz
60Hz
0
1080p
1920x
1080
67.5
kHz
60Hz
-
I
VGA
and
XGA
are
registered
trademarks
of
International
Business
Machines
Corp.
®-43
Page 46
Using the Internet
By
connec
ting
your
TV
to
a broadband system,
you
can
access
the
Internet
from
the
TV.
• Use
"AQUOS
ADVANTAGE
LIVE"
to
obtain the latest software
and
receive online user s
up
port.
(See
page
45.)
•
Yo
u
can
enjoy a variety
of
streaming
content
and
Internet
applications.
(See
page
47
.)
1m
• You
may not be
able
to
view 3D images when accessing the Internet.
(For the LE857U, LE757U,
LE
755U and
LE657U models)
Connecting
to
the
Internet
•
To
connect
your
TV
to
the
Internet,
you
must
ha
ve a
broadband
Internet
connection.
• If
yo
u
do
not
have
a
broadband
Internet
con
ne
ct
ion,
consult
the
sto
re where
you
purchased
you
r
TV
or
ask
your
Internet
service provider
or
telephone company.
•
When
an
Internet
connec
tion is made, an Ethernet
and
wireless
connection
cannot
be
used
at
the
same
time
.
Use
only
one
of
the connection types.
•
Using
an
ETHERNET
cable
Use
an
ETHERNET cable (commercially available)
to
connect
the
ETHERNET terminal
on
the
TV
to
yo
ur
broadband
router (commercially available).
ETHERNET
cable
Modem
Internet
•
Using
the
wireless LAN
This
TV
is
equipped
with a wireless LAN function.
For a wireless LAN connection, you
must
use "Wireless
Setup"
to
connect
the
access
point
and
TV.
Modem
Internet
•
This
lV
has a built-in wireless LAN function. Using a separate wireless USB LAN adapter may result
in
radio
communications that
do
not comply with regulations on radio communications. Therefor
e,
do
not use a separate
wireless LAN adapter.
•
A wireless LAN connection and performance cannot be guaranteed for
all residential environment
s.
In
the following
cases, the wireless LAN signal may be poor or drop, or the connection speed may become slower.
- When used
in
buildings made with concrete, reinforced steel,
or
metal
- When placed near objects that obstruct the signal
- When
used with other wireless devices that emit the same frequency
-When used in the vicinity of microwave ovens and other devices that emit a magnetic
field,
electrostatic
charge,
or
electromagnetic interference
•
When there is significant interference
in
th
e 2.4-GHz frequency (such as from other wireless
LAN
devices,
Bluetooth"
devices, 2.4-GHz cordless telephones, and microwave ovens), it is recommended that you use a wireless LAN
router/access point that supports
IEEE802.11
a/n
(5
GHz)
and set the access point
to
transmit at 5 GHz. For setup
details, see the operation manual of your access point.
®-44
Internet Setup
Perform
th
e
procedu
re
be
l
ow
to
make
adjustments
or
to
confirm
the
settings for a
cc
essing
the
Internet.
1
Press
MENU
to
display
the
MENU
sc
reen, and
then press
ENTER.
2
Press
<01111
/
11>-
to
select
"Initial Setup",
and
then
press
ENTER.
3
Press
J;..l"f
to
select
"In
ternet
Setup
',
and
then
press
ENTER.
4
Press
JJ..
/
"f
to
select
"Netwo
rk
Setup"
or
"
In
terac
tive Serv
ic
e",
and then press
ENTER.
• Select "Network Setup"
when you make general
adjustments
to
connect to the
Internet.
• If
you want
to
make settings to restrict access to
the
In
ternet, then sel
ec
t
"Interactive Service".
5
Press
JJ..
/
"f
to sel
ect
a specific
item
,
and
then
press
ENTER.
6
Press
JJ..
/
"f
(or
<01111
/
11>-
)
to
se
l
ect
the
desired
setting, and
then
press
ENTER.
7
Pr
ess
MENU
to
ex
i
t.
You
can
connect
your TV
to
the
Internet
using the
sett
ing item
"Network
Se
tup
".
Auto
Setup
Adjustments for
network
con
nect
i
on
will
be
made
automa
ti
ca
lly.
Select
"W
ir
ed
"
or
"Wireless"
and
f
ollow
the
instructions displayed on
the
sc
reen.
•
Automatic ad
ju
stments for wireless LAN connection
can be made
only
for the
WPS
method.
If your access point uses
any
other method, perform
"Manual Setup".
Select
the desired connec
ti
on meth
od
and
fo
ll
ow
the
instructions shown on the display.
Ma.
nual
Setup
Yo
u
can
make
adjustments
manually
for
network
connection.
•
Connection
Type
Select
t
he
connection type.
Wired:
The signal is
de
tected and setup is
performed automatically. Use
"
IP
Setup"
to
check
and change the settings as necessary.
Wireless:
Configure the access point settings on
"Wi
re
less Setup".
•
Wireless Setup
Make
ad
ju
stments
an
d c
on
firm the
sett
i
ngs
nec
essary for wirele
ss
LA
N connection (such
as
se
arch
for the
acces
s poi
nt
and
regi
stra
tion of it).
WPS
push
button:
A
ll
ows
the
lV
to
automatica
ll
y
establ
ish
t
he
connection
us
ing
a button on the
access point.
WPS
PIN
code:
Sets up the connection by
registering a
PIN
co
de for the access
po
int.
Selecting wireless network:
Searches for and
se
lects the access point
to
be
connected.
Registering wireless network:
Allows you to make
the connection by entering
an
SSID
for the access
point.
If
yo
ur
access
po
i
nt
supports
Wi
-Fi
Prote
cted
Setup
(W
PS
push button m
ethod
}, it is re
commende
d that
yo
u
use
this function
for
the wireless
connec
tion.
You
can
press the
WPS
bu
tt
on
on
the
access
po
int
to
co
nfigure
the
settin
gs
au
tom
at
ically.
•
The
nam
e of the WPS
button function may differ
depending on the access point.
See
the operation
manual of the access point for details.
1
Confirm
the
current settings in
"
Co
nnec
tion
T
ype'
.
• If "Wired"
is
se
lected, press
..,./
11>-
to select
"Wireless".
2
Press
JJ..
/
"f
to
select
"Wireless
Setup"
, a
nd
th
en
press
ENTER.
•
Confirm the settings.
If
each setting item
is
cor
rec
t,
press
MENU
to e
xi
t.
• If
you are configuring the wireless setup for the
fi
rst time or changing the settings, go to step 3.
3
Press
<01111
/
11>-
to
select
"
Cha
nge
",
and
t
he
n press
ENTER.
4
Select
the
desir
ed
connection
met
h
od
and follow
the
instructi
ons
s
how
n
on
the display.
5
When
a
connect
i
on
is es
ta
blished, the
co
nne
ct
ion details are displayed.
Press
ENTER.
•
Operations cannot
be
guaranteed when used with
access poin
ts
that
do
not have
Wi-Fi" certification.
•
A wireless LAN router/access point
is
required to
connect t
he
lV
to the
Internet
using a wireless LAN.
See
the operation manual
of
your access point for
setup.
• If
your access point is set
to
a stealth mode (that
prevents detection
by
other devi
ces),
you may n
ot
be
ab
le
to
establi
sh
a connectio
n.
In
this case, disable t
he
stealth mode on the access poin
t.
•
A stable connection sp
ee
d
is
required to
play
back
streaming content. Use an Ethernet connection
if the
wireless
LAN
speed is unstable.
•
Before transferring
to
a third party or disposal, be s
ur
e
to initi
alize
the wireless LAN settings.
• Plea
se
follow the legislation in your country when using
the wirel
ess
LAN
outdoor
s.
Page 47
Using the
Internet
•IP
Setup
You
can
make
adjustments
manually
for
the
IP.
o
Check that numbers are
displayed for each setting.
o
If
there are any settings without numbers, specify the
numbers by
following
the
on-screen instructions.
o
For information on
how
to
enter text, see
"Entering
Text (Software Keyboard)".
Example
I!
Ponnection
Test
After
the
connecting
and
setting
procedures
have
been
completed,
you
can
check
that
the
preparation
is
correct.
Press "Yes"
to
start
the
"Connection
Test"
.
o
When the test
results
are
displayed, follow the
instructions shown on the screen.
If
you
do
not
want
other
people
to
connect
to
the
Internet
in
your
absence,
you
can
make
settings
to
keep
the
lV
away
from
the
Internet.
• Input
the 4-digit secret number by using
0-9.
•
LE857U, LE757U, LE755U and
LE657U
models
1
Press
SmartCentral
to
display
the
application
window.
2
Press
....
/~
to
select
"AQUOS
ADVANTAGE
LIVE",
and
then
press
ENTER.
• LE650U, C7500U
and
C6500U
models
Pre
ss
AAL
to
display
the
AOUOS
ADVANTAGE
LIVE
screen.
0
You can aiso
display
the AQUOS
ADVANTAGE
LIVE
screen
by
application
window.
o
If
"~
"
or
"o~O"
is
displayed
after you connect
to
the
Internet,
check your TV's network settings
and connection.
o
When the
AQUOS
ADVANTAGE LIVE
sc
reen
appears,
now
you are connected to the Internet.
o
You
can also display
the
AQUOS
ADVANTAGE
LIVE
screen by pressing
FAV
APP
on the remote
control
unit.
See
page
47
for
details.
o
If
you have
failed
to
connect
to
the
Internet
in the
above operation, then an error message
wi
ll
appear.
In
this case, press
EXIT
to exit from the connected TV
feature to make c
ha
nges
to
the
network
settings.
o
If
you
still
cannot connect to
the
Internet, please
consult
your
Internet
service provider
or
telephone
company.
o
When an
application
is used, you cann
ot
make settings
for
"Internet
Setup".
If
you need
to
make the settings
of
"Internet Setup",
press
EXIT
to
exit from the connected TV feature.
•
If
you cannot connect
to
the
Internet
If
the
lV
fails
to
connect
to
the
Internet,
the
n
select
"
Network
Setup
"
and;
o
When the TV is in a wired
LAN
connection, make sure
the
values
for
"IP Setup"
are
all correctly set.
o
In
the case
of
a
wireless LAN
connection, check the
settings
of
"Wireless Setup".
AQUOS Advantage Live
This function
can
be
used
to
display
up
-
to-date
information
and
allow
you
to
receive
support
service
over
the
network.
•
LE857U, LE757U, LE755U and LE657U models
1
Press
SmartCentral
to
display
the
application
window.
2
Press
....
/~
to
select
"AOUOS
ADVANTAGE
LIVE".
and
then
press
ENTER.
•
LE650U,
C7500U
and
C6500U
models
1
Press
AAL
to
display
the
AOUOS
ADVANTAGE
LIVE
screen.
(Go
to
step
3)
o
You can aiso
display
the
AQUOS
ADVANTAGE
LIVE
screen by
application
window.
o
You
can
also display
the
AQUOS
ADVANTAGE
LIVE
screen
by
pressing
FAV
APP
on the remote
control
unit.
See
page
47
for
details.
o
When you are
not
connected
to
the
Internet,
a
network function explanation
screen is displayed.
The services
displayed
vary depending on
circumstances.
3
Press
JJ../'Y
I
..,..
;
~
to
select
the
desired
service.
4
Press
EXIT
to
exit
from
the
connected
lV
feature.
o
The
display
may
cha
nge as a
result
of
a software
update.
Entering Text (Software Keyboard)
When
you
are
editing
an
input
screen
or
specifying
the
Networ
k
settings
used
fo
r
accessing
the
Internet,
en
te
r
text
from
the
software
keyboard.
o
You
can enter
up
to
1
28
characters
for
text.
o
Some special
characters
or
diacritics
may
no
t be
available
de
pe
nding
on
where
yo
u enter the text.
T
he
text
yo
u enter
is
di
sp
la
yed
as
yo
u type it
in
.
To
move
the cursor (the current input
position),
use
Whi
le
you
are
entering
text,
li
kel
y
inp
ut
conver
sion
candidates
are
displayed
based
on
what
you
typed
in
.
Caps
Off/Caps
Lock
If
"alphabet
"
is
selected,
this
switches
c
haracter
s
between
uppercase
and
l
owercase
.
Each
time
you
press
ENTER,
the
character
type
sw
i
tc
h
es
as
shown
below:
Caps
Off: all
the
characters
a
re
l
owercased
Caps
Lock:
all
t
he
characters
are
uppercas
ed
Shift
Capitalizes
the
first
character
entere
d.
alphabet/Sign
Press
ENTER
to
select
the
type
of
cha
r
acters
entered:
alphabet,
or
sign.
Back
space/Delete
Erases
tex
t o
ne
character
at a ti
me
.
Buttons on
the
remOte
C:e>Otfol
unit
·.
Enter
App
li
es
the
entered
i
nforma
ti
on
a
nd
closes
t
he
softwa
re
keyboard.
Space
Enters a
space.
Clear
Er
ases
the
ch
aracter
str
ing.
o
When
the
cursor is
somew
here in a
li
ne:
the char
acte
r
str
i
ng
to
the right
of
the
c
ur
s
or
wi
ll
be erased.
o
When
the
c
ur
sor is
at
the right end
of
a
line:
the
e
nt
ire
li
ne wi
ll
be
erased.
Quit
Closes
the
softw
are
keyboar
d wit
ho
ut
applyi
ng
th
e
entered
infor
matio
n.
Description
JJ../'Y/
....
1~
Moves the foc
us
.
When
moved
at
t
he
far edge, the foc
us
moves to the opposite
edge
.
ENTER
Performs
the processing f
or
the
bu
tt
on
cur
rently
in the focus.
EXIT
Closes the software keyboard without
app
lying
the
original
in
put elements
for the
enter
ed
text.
RETURN
When the cur
so
r is
at
the end
of
a sentence, t his acts as a
ba
ck
space.
0-9
Directly
enters the
single-byte number f
or
that button.
When
A, B or
C
is pressed on the remote
control while
t
he
characters
to
be entered in
A,B,C
the
likely
input conversion candidate are
displayed
in
A, B
or
C
on the keyboard, that
cha
racter
st
ring is entered into the display field.
D
Enters a s
pa
ce
®-
45
Page 48
Using the Internet
Using
the
Browser
1
Press
SmartCentral
to
display
the
application
window.
•
Press
SmartCentral
again
to
display a
list
of
applications by category.
2
Press
<11/..,.(or
£/T)
to
select
the
Web
Browser
icon
,
and
then
press
ENTER.
• If
you changed the display to the
list
of
applications
in
step 1, select a category and then select the
Web Browser icon.
•
Buttons for Using
the
Browser
VIEW
MODE
•
Each time you press
VIEW MODE
when a
browser screen is shown, the display pattern
toggles between a website-only screen and a
1V+Web screen.
FAV
APP1,
2, 3
• You
can change the screen display method when
a Web browser application
is
assigned
to
the
FAV APP
buttons. Each time a
FAV APP
button
assigned to a browser application is pressed
while
a browser is open, the screen switches between
Web-site
only
sc
reen and 1V+Web screen.
ENTER,./T/<11/
....
•
Press
J!/'f
I..,..;..,.
to
select a link that you want to
jump, and then press
ENTER.
EXIT
•
Press the button to return
to
the
1V
screen.
RETURN
•
Press the button
to
return
to
the previous page.
D
•
Display the toolbar.
• You
cannot
play
audio
or
movies
in
the browser screen
while
a 1V+Web screen is displayed.
•
When displaying 1V+Web with a channel
in
which
the V-Chip
is
enabled, the cursor
keys
on the remote
control unit do
not
function.
•
Restrictions
apply
to
window display.
®-
46
Tool
bar
~ed,it8m
li
il
~
Ill
iJ
riJ
~
iJ
;.!
ri
liJ
Pages
with security protec
tion,
"6"
will
be
di
sp
l
ayed.
1
••
,
.•••
·
:
~nptkin
.·
..
·
Allows
you
to
go
ba
ck
to
the
previous page.
Allows
you
to
go
to
the
ne
xt
page.
Refreshes the page.
Interrupts
a page
wh
i
le
it is loading.
Switches between virtual mouse and
spatial navigation modes. Switching
modes
also
switches the display.
Depending on the page displayed,
switching this function may make it
easier
to
use the browser.
Opens
a search window
below
the
toolbar.
You
can use this
to
search
for a word within the displayed
page.
Displays the home page.
You
can
set the page displayed
as
your
home page when the browser starts
up.
(See
page 47.)
Displays the bookmarks
li
st.
Displays your
br
owsing history.
Configures browser settings such
as
your home page and browsing
security.
(See
page 47.)
Zooms the display in
or
out.
Res
trictions
apply
to
window display.
•About
links
•
Web
pages
on
the
Internet
often include
"links"
that
allow y
ou
to
jump
to
other
web
pages
(or sites).
• "Links"
can
take
various forms, including
wo
r
ds
or
images,
but
they alwa
ys
wo
rk
in
the
same
way
letting
you
jump
to
the
li
nk
destination
when
you
se
l
ect
th
em.
•
Selected
items
(such as
links
of
text
input fields)
are
enclosed
in a frame.
• Y
ou
can j
ump
from a
"link"
to
the corresponding
li
nk
dest
ination.
DISCLAIMERS
SHARP
corporation
bea
rs
no
responsibility
regarding
the
content
and quality
of
the
co
ntent
prov
i
ded
by
the
content
serve provider.
i@iii@•
• If
the power is
cut
due
to
a power failure
or
the
1V
being unplugged
while
you are using the
In
ternet,
i
nf
ormation such as bookmarks or cookies may not be
saved
co
rrectly.
When a security notification window is displayed:
•
Press
ENTER
to
close
the window.
• This window appears when you visit a web page that
has security protectio
n,
or when you move from a
protected page to an unprotected page.
•
In
"S
ecurity"
you can set whether or not this window is
displayed. (See page 47
.)
To
use
rs
who
access
the
Internet from a
PC
•
When
you
access
the
Internet
from
this TV,
the
procedures
may
n
ot
be
the
same
as
regular
browser-based
access
on
a PC.
•
On
some
pages, video
an
d audio,
text
or
images
may
not
be
displayed correctly.
powered
.,
http:/ /
www
.espi
al
.com
You
can
use
the
t
ool
bar
to
control
the
bro
wse
r and
to
specify setti
ngs
.
1
Press
D
to
con
t
ro
l
th
e
too
lbar.
2
Press
<11
/
..,.
to
select a function, and t
he
n pr
ess
ENTER.
Brow$ing
Web
Contents
·:
-. ,
.
~
_
You
can
display
th
e
web
co
ntent
you
wan
t
to
en
j
oy
.
1
Press
D
to
displa
y
the
toolbar.
2
Press
<11
/
..,.
to
move
to the address area in
th
e
toolbar,
and
then
press
ENTER.
• The
En
ter Address m
enu
is displayed.
3
Enter an address, and then
pr
ess
ENTER.
• The web con tent you want to view
is
displayed.
Page 49
Using the Internet
You
can
check
or modify
your
browser settings from
the Browser menu.
1
Press
D
to
display the toolbar.
2
Press
..,..;..,..
to
select"~"
in the toolbar, and
then press
ENTER.
3
Press
J;./T
to
select
and
co
nfirm the item you
want
to
set.
4
Press
JJ..
/
'f
I..,..;..,..
to
specify the required setting,
and then press
ENTER.
5
Press
D
to
exit.
Home
Page:
You
can set
the
page displayed as
your home page when
the
browser starts up.
Encoding:
You
can select
the
desired encoding
from the list below:
Western
(IS0-8859-1)/Unicode
(UTF-8)
Page Information:
Displays information about
the
currently
displayed page.
Security:
Secure sites:
When
set to "Disabled" , HTIPS
sites cannot be
access
ed.
Security warnings:
When
set to
"Enabled",
displays warning dialogs
wh
en
goi
ng
HTIP
._.
HTIPS
.
Certificates:
Display the list
of
certificates.
You
can
choose
to
enable/disable a certificate.
• Disable certificate
are
shown unticked
in
the
certificate list scr
ee
n.
Cookies:
Accept
all:
Sel
ect
this
op
tion to accept a
ll
coo
kies.
Reject
all:
Select
this option
wh
en
you do not want
to accept cookies.
Delete
All
Cookies:
Deletes
all
your cookies.
Using Keyboard and Mouse
Y
ou
can
use a keyboard
or
mouse for o
pe
rating the
1V
while using the browser.
•
When you use
the
USB
devices, conne
ct
the
device
to
the
USB
terminal
on
the
1V.
•
When you use
the
bluetooth
de
vice, make
necessary settings
wi
th
"Biuetooth Setup". (See
page 27.) (For
the
LE857U, LE757U, LE755U and
LE657U models)
ED
•
The keyboard and mouse can only be used on a
browser screen.
The keyboard
or mouse may not ope
ra
te prope
rly
depending on the applic
ati
on being u
se
d.
•
The software keyboard cannot be u
se
d by the
keyboard and mouse connected via Bluetooth
even
on
the browser scre
en.
•
The
bluetooth device may not operate p
ro
pe
rly
depending on the device being used.
Using Applications via the
Internet
By
conne
ct
i
ng
the
1V
to
the
Internet,
you can enjoy
a varie
ty
of br
oadband
content. including videos,
music and photos.
Please
check
th
at
the
most
current software is
loaded
on
1V
by
selecting
"Au
to
Upd
at
e Setting"
on
"Software
Update"
(see page
28
)
or
by
visiting
http
:!
/www
.sharousa.co
m/
produc
ts
/
support/
to check for a download of the newest softw
are
vers
io
n.
Use the
ap
p
li
ca
tion
window
to access y
our
favori
te
Internet applications.
Press
SmartCentral
to
display
th
e
ap
plication
window
.
Fo
ll
ow
the
on-screen instructions for each
ap
plicatio
n.
•
When using this
TV
to
a
cc
ess
an
Internet applicati
on
for the first time, the
Di
sclaimer appea
rs
on the scr
ee
n.
Press
JJ..
/
'f
to
select
"Agr
ee
",
and
the
n press
ENTER.
(You
must
se
lect "Agree"
to u
se
the applicati
on
.)
•
Check the web site
of
the provider for details on
se
tup
and use of the functions.
rm
• If
"
~"
or
"
0
~
0"
is di
sp
la
ye
d after you connect to
the
Inte
rn
et,
check your TV's n
et
work settings and
co
nn
ection.
• Additio
nal
applications
wi
ll
be ava
il
ab
le
in the future.
•
These applications are provided
by
content provide
rs.
The av
ai
la
b
le
applications vary depend
in
g on your
country or regio
n.
•
The d
eli
ve
ry speed
of
applica
ti
ons
vari
es depend
in
g
on
the network sp
ee
d.
Check the
we
b site of the provider
for deta
ils
on application setup
and
other info
rm
ation.
During
Doc~
'
Di8play
<
···
You can move
the
application icons and delete any
unused icons.
Example
1
Select
an application, and then press
JJ...
2
Press
J;.
/
'f
to
select
"Mo
ve
Ap
p"
or
"Delete
App
",
and then press
ENTER.
•
Move
the
Icons
Yo
u
ca
n move the i
co
ns
of
the more co
mm
only u
se
d
applications
closer
to
th
e left.
Pre
ss
..,..
;
..,..
to
move the i
co
n to the desir
ed
l
oca
tion.
•
Delete
an
Application
Se
le
ct
"Delete App"
to
delete t
he
icon.
•
Saving Favorite
Applications
Y
ou
can
set
your
fa
vo
ri
te
appl
ic
ations to
th
e
FAV
APP1
, 2,
and
3
bu
tt
ons
on t
he
remote control f
or
easi
er
startup.
Th
e
app
lications wh
ose
i
co
ns
ar
e m
ov
ed
on
to
G),
®
and
@
dur
ing D
oc
k Di
sp
lay
wi
ll
be assi
gne
d to
the
FAV
APP
1,
2
and
3
butto
ns r
es
pectivel
y.
mm
•
The SmartCentral
icon cannot
be
moved or deleted.
During
Gallery
DiSplay
Dur
i
ng
Dock display, press
SmartCentral
a
ga
in
to
display a list of applicati ons
by
category.
1
Press
..,..
;
..,..
to
se
lect a
cat
e
go
ry, and then press
ENTER
or
'f.
2
Pre
ss
J;.
/
'f
I
..,..
;
..,..
to
se
l
ec
t
an
application, a
nd
then press
ENTER.
CD
Displa
ys
a
li
st of applications for t
he
se
lected
category that can be displayed
on
the
TV.
Press
ENTER
to add or delete app
li
ca
ti
ons to or
from the
ap
plicati
on
window
an
d favo
ri
tes.
®D
isp
lays
the image now playing.
@P
r
ov
ides
a description of the selected application.
@D
isplayed when there are multiple pag
es.
Press
..,..
;
..,..
to
ch
ange page
s.
@ Guide display of
requi
r
ed
operation buttons.
Qeactht~til
1
g
~Hlix
Funetion
· ·
You
ca
n
deac
tivate the Netflix function. Refer
to
"I
nformation">
"Netflix
Hel
p'
and sel
ect
"Deactivate
".
•
To confirm the
Ne
tflix stat
us
, check t
he
information
di
sp
la
yed on the screen and click
"OK
".
Deactivating~
VUDU
FunctiOn
To
deactivate the VUDU fu
nc
tion, refer
to
"Information">
"VUDU
Help" and
se
l
ec
t "Y
es
".
®-
47
Page 50
Using the
Internet
When
you
access
the
Internet application
for
the
first
time,
the
following
appears.
• This message is available only in English.
DISCLAIMERS
•
This SHARP
device facilitates the access
to
content and services
prov
i
ded
by
third parties. The
co
ntent
and
services accessible via this device belong
to
and may
be
proprietary
to
third parties. Therefore, any
use
of
such third party content and services must be in accordance with any authorization
or
terms
of
use
provided
by
such content or service provider.
SHARP shall
not
be
liable
to
you
or
any third party for
your
failure
to
abide
by
such authorization
or
terms
of
use. Unless otherwise specifically authorized
by
the
applicable content or service provider,
all
third party content and services provided are for personal
and
non-commercial use; you may
not
modify, copy,
distribute, transmit. display, perform, reproduce,
upload,
publish,
license, create derivative works
from,
transfer
or
sell
in any manner
or
medium any
content
or services available via this device.
• SHARP is
not
responsible,
nor
liable, for
cus
to
mer service-related issues related
to
the
third party
content
or services. Any questions,
comments
or
service-related inquiries relating
to
the
third party
content
or
service should
be
made directly
to
the
applicable
content
or
service provider.
You
may
not
be
able
to
access content
or
services from the device
for
a variety
of
reasons which may
be
unrelated
to
the
device itself, including, but not limited
to,
power
failure, other
Internet
connection,
or
failure
to
configure your device properly.
SHARP,
its directors, officers, employees, agents, contractors
and
affiliates shall
not
be
liable to you
or
any third party with respect
to
such failures
or
maintenance
outages, regardless
of
cause
or
whether
or
not it could have been avoided.
•
ALL
THIRD PARTY CONTENT OR SERVICES ACCESSIBLE VIA THIS DEVICE IS PROVIDED TO YOU
ON
AN
"AS-IS" AND
'AS
AVAILABLE" BASIS
AND
SHARP
AND
ITS AFFILIATES
MAKE NO
WARRANTY
OR REPRESENTATION OF
ANY
KIND
TO
YOU, EITHER EXPRESS
OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION,
ANY
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, NON-INFRINGEMENT, FITNESS
FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
ANY
WARRANTIES OF SUITABILITY, AVAILABILITY, ACCURACY,
COMPLETENESS, SECURITY, TITLE,
USEFULNESS, LACK
OF
NEGLIGENCE
OR ERROR-FREE
OR
UNINTERRUPTED OPERATION OR
USE
OF THE
CONTENT OR SERVICES PROVIDED
TO
YOU OR
THAT
THE
CONTENT OR SERVICES
WILL
MEET
YOUR REQUIREMENTS
OR
EXPECTATIONS.
• SHARP
IS
NOT
AN AGENT
OF AND ASSUMES
NO
RESPONSIBILITY FOR
THE ACTS
OR OMISSIONS
OF
THIRD PARTY CONTENT OR SERVICE PROVIDERS, NOR
ANY
ASPECT
OF
THE CONTENT
OR
SERVICE
RELATED
TO
SUCH
THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS.
• IN
NO
EVENT
WILL SHARP AND/OR ITS AFFILIATES
BE LIABLE
TO
YOU OR ANY
THIRD PARTY
FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, CONSEQUENTIAL OR OTHER
DAMAGES, WHETHER THE
THEORY OF LIABILITY
IS
BASED
ON CONTRACT, TORT,
NEGLIGENCE,
BREACH
OF
WARRANTY,
STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE
AND WHETHER
OR
NOT
SHARP
AND/
OR ITS AFFILIATES HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF
THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES.
Examples
of
Application
Logos
NflfliK
[
V~.J
I
HD Movies ] [
V~.J
I
Apps ]
t
~
CinernaNow
YouiD
®-
48
Page 51
Appendix
Removing the Stand
• Before detaching (or attaching) the stand, make sure to turn
off
the
1V
and unplug the AC cord.
E D
• Do not remove the stand from the TV unless using an optional wall mount bracket to mount it .
• LC-70LE857U/LC60LE857U
1
CD
Loosen the screw used
to
secure the stand
cover.
® Remove the cover.
2 Unfasten
the
four
screws
used
to
secure
the
stand in place.
3 Deta
ch
the stand fr
om
the TV.
• LC-70LE757U/LC-60LE757U/LC-70LE755U/
LC-60LE755U/LC-70C7500UILC-60C7500U
1
CD
Loosen the screws used to secure the stand
cover.
® Move
th
e stand cover upward, and pu
ll
it
toward
you
to
remove.
2 Unfasten
the lour screws used
to
secure the
stand in place.
3 Det
ac
h the stand
from the
TV.
• LC-70LE657U/LC-60LE657U/LC-70LE650U/
LC-60LE650U/LC-70C6500U/LC-60C6500U
1
Unf
asten the four
screws
used
to
secure the
stand
in
plac
e.
2 Detach the stand from the
TV.
• In the installation procedure,
be
careful not to catch your fingers between
the
TV
set and the floor.
I
I
~
-~~~
If"
® - 49
Page 52
Appendix
Setting the TV
on
the Wall
iiJ!ii@l
• This
TV
should
be
mounted on the wall only with the wall mount bracket AN-52AG4 (SHARP). The use of
other wall mount brackets may result
in
an unstable installation and may cause serious injuries.
• Installing the
TV
requires special skill that should only be performed
by
qualified service personnel.
Customers should not attempt to do the work themselves. SHARP bears
no
responsibility for improper
mounting or mounting that results
in
accident or injury.
Using
an
optional
bracket
to
mount
the
TV
• You can ask a qualified service professional about using
an
optional
AN~52AG4
bracket to mount the
lV
on the wall.
• Carefully
read the instructions that come with the bracket before beginning work.
Hanging
on
the
wall
AN~52AG4
wall
mount
bracket.
(See
the
bracket
instructions
for
details.)
Vertical
mounting
Angular
mounting
@~50
About setting the
TV
angle
AN-52AG4
LC-70LE857U/LC-70LE757U/
LC-70LE755UILC-70C7500U
• The center of the display:
13
/64
inch
(5
mm) above the "c"
position.
LC-60LE857U/LC-60LE757U/
LC-60LE755U/LC-60C7500U
• The "c" position is at the center
of the
display.
LC-70LE657UILC-70LE650UI
LC-70C6500U
• The center of the display:
25
/
64
inch (10 mm) above the "c"
position.
LC-60LE657UILC-60LE650U/
LC-60C6500U
• The "e" position
is
at the center
of
the display.
•
Refer
to
the operation manual
of
AN~52AG4
for details.
•
Due to the terminal configuration on this
lV,
when you
wall~mount
this model, make sure there
is
enough space
between the
wall and the
lV
for the cables.
•
To use this
lV
mounted on a wall, remove the
ACcord
holder
on
the rear
of
the
lV,
and then use the screws
supplied
with the
wall mount bracket
to
secure the bracket to the rear
of
the
lV.
• LC-70LE857U/ LC-60LE857U
• The location of the AC cord holder differs depending
on whether
it
is
in
its shipment
location®
or has been
used as a
cable
tie@.
Attached
location
at
shipment
!!I B
D
@
.,.<D
<D.t'h
~~
If
used
as a cable
tie
• LC-70LE657UILC-70LE650U/LC-70C6500U
• LC-70LE757U/LC-60LE757UILC-70LE755UI
LC-60LE755UILC-70C7500UI LC-60C7500U
• The location
of
the AC cord holder differs depending
on whether it
is
in
its shipment location ® or has been
used
as
a cable
tie@.
Attached location
at
shipment
~
....
'
W·
I .
@
.,.<D
<D.t'h
~~
If
used
as
a cable
tie
• LC-60LE657UILC-60LE650UILC-60C6500U
.,.<D
<D~,.-y-:_'
_:
e
~
~[]~·
~~
~
u
Page 53
Appendix
Troubleshooting
Problem Possible Solution
•
No
power
•
Check if you pressed
POWER
on
the remote
control
unit.
•
Page
14
• Is
the
AC
cord disconnected?
•
Page 7
•
Has the power been turned on?
•
Page 14
•
Unit cannot
be
• External influences
such
as
lightning,
static
electricity,
may cause improper
ope
ration.
operated. In
this case, operate
the
un
it after first turning
off
the power
of
the
lV
or
unplugging
the AC cord and
replugging
it in after 1
or
2 minutes.
•
Remote
control
unit
• Is
the equipment
to
be
ope
rated by the remote
control
unit set
correctly? Press
TV
to
does
not operate. set the remote
control
unit
to
the setting for operating the
lV.
•
Are batteries inserted with pol
arity
(
+ ,
-)
aligned? •
Page 8
•
Are batteries worn
out
?
(Replace
with new batteries.)
•
Are you using it under
st
rong
or
fluorescent
lighting?
• Is
a
fluorescent light illumi
na
te
d
near the remote con
tr
ol
sensor?
• Is "RC Control
Lock"
selected
in
"Operation
Lock
Out"? •
Page 25
• Picture
is
cut
off/with
• Is
the image position correct?
•
Pages
25
and 42
sidebar screen.
•
Are screen mode adjustmen
ts
such as picture size made
correctly?
•
Pages 18 and 19
•
Strange
color,
•
Adjust the picture tone.
•
Pages 22 and 23
light color,
or
color
• Is
the room
too
bright? The picture may look
dark in
a room that is
to
o bright.
misalignment
• Power
is
suddenly
• Is
the sleep timer se
t?
•
Page 17
turned off.
•
Check the power
control
settings.
•
Page
24
•
The unit's
internal
temperature has increased. Remove
an
y objects
blocking
vent or
cl
ean.
•
No
picture
• Is
connection
to
other components correct?
..
Pages
11
to
13 and
39
• Is
the correct input selected? •
Pages
11
and 16
• Is "On" selected
in
"Audio Only"? •
Page
24
• If
the
PC
image is not
displayed,
check the
following:
- When connecting a
laptop PC
to the
lV
, check that display
outp
ut
mode
of
the
PC
is set
to
external
monitor.
- Check the
resolution
setting on the
PC.
Is
a non-compatible signal
being i
np
ut?
•Page43
• Picture quality
of
HD
•
To enjoy HD images from
external
equipment, you are required
to
set
up
HDMI
programs is poor. connection
or
component connection.
• If
the program content is n
ot
of
HD
quality,
HD images
ca
nnot
be
displayed.
Check
that the program you are vi
ew
ing provides
HD
image
s.
•
The HD
cable/satellite
set-top
box may need
to
be configured
to
output
HD
images
via
cable/satellite.
•
The
cable/satellite broadcast may not support a
signal resolution
of
1080
p.
•
The
lV
sometimes
•
This is not a malfunction.
This happens when the cabinet slightly
expands
and
makes a cracking contracts according
to
change in temperature. This does
not
affect the
lV's
sound.
performance.
•
TheAQUOS
• Is
the ETHERNET
cable
connected
correctly?
..
Page 44
ADVANTAGE
LIVE
• Check the settings
of
"Internet Setup". •
Pages 44 to 45
can
not
be
displayed.
•
Some
Internet
•
The
lV
has
only limit
ed
functions compared with
regular PC
browsers.
•Page46
functions used on a PC
are not available
from
thelV.
Problem
•
No
sound
Possible Solution
• Is
connecti
on
to
other com
po
nents
co
rrect?
..
Pages
11
to
13
and 39
• Is
the
vo
lume
too
l
ow
? •
Page 16
• Is "Variable" sele
cted
in "Output Select"? •
Page 25
•
Ha
ve you pressed
MUTE
on the rem
ote
control
unit?
•
Page
16
•
Check the
au
d
io
output of t
he
conn
ec
ted
e
xternal
equipment.
Is
the
vo
l
ume
too
low
or
muted?
• When
external
equipment is connected via an
HDMI
cab
le,
yo
u
may
need to
co
nf
igure
the audio to
be
ou
tp
ut through the HDMI c
ab
le.
•
When audio is not
ou
tp
ut from
external
equipment connect
ed
to
the
PC IN
or
HDMI IN
2 termi
na
l,
check t
he
"Audio Sele
ct"
setting.
•
Page 42
• Even when
external
equipment
is connected using an
HDMI-
ce
rtified cable,
an
a
ud
io
cab
le
connection may be required
de
pending on the type
of
e
qu
i
pm
ent an d the media
be
ing
played back.
In
this case,
in
addition
to
conn
ect
ing an HDMI-certi
fi
ed
cable
to
the
HDM
I IN
2
terminal,
co
nnect a
0
3.5
mm
stereo mini
jac
k
ca
ble
to
the
AUDIO IN
terminal
and set
"Audio Select"
to
"HDMI+Analog". •
Page
42
• When connecting a PC
v
ia an HDMI
-c
ertified
cable,
check the
fo
ll
owing:
-
Is
the audio outp
ut
of the
PC
co
nfigured
cor
re
ct
ly?
Ch
ec
k
th
e audio
ou
tput settin
gs
and output audio format
in
Sound
Properties
on the
PC.
The audio fomna
ts
com
pa
tible
with this
lV
are
PCM, Dolby Digital
and DTS.
With
ot
h
er
formats,
aud
io cannot be
ou
tput.
Depending on the
boa
rd,
only
v
i
deo
signals
may
be
o
utp
ut.
In
this case,
in
additi
on
to
con
necting an HDMI-cert
ifi
ed
ca
ble
to the
HDMI
IN
2 termina
l,
connect a
0
3.5
mm
st
ereo minijack
ca
ble
to the
AUDIO
IN
termi
na
l
and
set
"Audio
Se
l
ec
t"
to
"H
DM
I+Analog "
...
Page 42
• If you are using a
DV
I-
HDMI
conversion
ca
ble
to connect
ex
ternal
e
qu
ipment
to
the
lV
, check the
following:
-
Is
an audio
cable
co
nnected? The
D
VI
-HDMI
co
nversion
c
ab
le
is for video
only.
Co
nnect a
0
3.5
mm
stereo mi
ni
jack
cable
to listen to the au
dio
.
-
Is HDMI IN
2 bei
ng
used? When the
lV
is connect
ed
to
ano
th
er
H
DMIIN
termin
al
,
the audio and v
i
deo
a
re
no
t out
put
to
ge
ther even if a
0
3.5 mm ster
eo
minija
ck
cable
is
co
nnected
to
the shared
AUDIO IN terminal
for PC IN
and
HDMI IN
2.
-
C
hec
k the
"Audio Select"
se
tt
ing.
S
et
"Audio
Se
lect"
to
"H
DM
I+Analog". •
Page 42
Troubleshooting
-
3D
Images
(for
the
LE857U,
LE757U,
LE755U
and
LE657U
models
)
Problem
Possible Solution
•
3D images are not
• Is "3D
A
uto
Change"
set
to
"O
ff
"? Press
30
to
sw
itch to
3D
mo
de
.
•
Page
31
displa
ye
d.
• If "
3D
Auto
Change"
is set
to
"
Mode
1"
or
"Mode 2"
b
ut
no
3D
images are
displayed,
check the
display
format
of
the
co
ntent
be
ing viewed.
So
me
3D
image signals
ma
y
not be re
co
gnized as 3D images au
to
ma
tically.
Press
30
to
select
the
app
ropriate
di
sp
lay
f
or
ma
t for t
he
3D image.
•
Pages
31
to 32
• Is the
po
we
r
of
the 3D
Glasses
turned on?
•
Are the
3D
Glasses
set to 2D
mod
e?
F
or
further
de
tails,
refer
to the operati
on
manu
al
of
yo
ur 3D
Glasses.
® -
51
Page 54
Appendix
Troubleshooting - Error Message
The
example
of
an
error
Error
message
displayed
on
a
code
Possible Solution
screen
•
Failed
to
receive
E202
•
Check the antenna cabl
e.
Check that the antenna is
co
rrectly setup.
broadcast.
•
No
broadcast now.
E203
•
Check the broadcast time in the program guide.
•
An incompatible
-
• This message is displayed when an audio format other than PCM,
DTS
or
audio signal has been
Dolby
Digital is input.
re
ceived. Check the - Set
the audio output format
of
connected external
HDMI
equipme
nt
to
output
device settings. PCM, DTS
or
Dolby Digital.
- Refer
to
the operation manual
of
the external equipment for setting
details.
Information
on
the
Software License for This Product
Software
License
You
can
read
the
software
licenses in
the
on-screen
display
menu.
Refer
to
"lnfonmation"
>"Softwa
re
License".
•
Software
composition
The
software
included in this
product
is
comprised
of
various
software
components
whose
individual
copyrights
are
held
by
SHARP
or
by
third parties.
Cautions regarding use in high and
low
temperature environments
•
When the unit is used
in
a
low
temperature space
(e
.g. room, office),
the
picture may
leave
trails or appear
slightly
delayed. This is not a malfunction, and the unit
will
recover
when
the temperature returns
to
normal.
•
Do
not
leave the unit in a hot or cold location.
Als
o,
do
not
leave
th
e unit
in
a location exposed
to
direct sunlight
or near a heater, as this may cause the cabinet
to
deform and the front
panel
to
malfunction.
Storage
temperature: - 4
°F
to
+
140°F
(-
20oc
to
+
60°C)
®-52
CLEARING
THE
SECRET
NUMBER
If
you f
org
et
the
secret number,
clear
the
secre
t
num
be
r using
th
e
following
pr
oc
ed
ure.
1
Select
an
item
from
the
li
st
below
to
display
the
sec
r
et
number
in
put
sc
r
ee
n. (
For
operating
th
e on-
screen display menu, see
page
20
.)
• "Col
or
system
"(
+-
"Terminal Setting"
+-
System
Options menu).
• "EZ
Setup" or
"Reset" (
+-
Initial Setup
me
nu
).
• "CH Setup" (+-"Broadcasting Setup"
+-
Initial Setup
menu).
• "Parental CTRL" (+- "Individual Setup"
+-
Initi
al
Setup
menu
).
• "Interactive Service" (+- "Internet Setup"
+-
Initial Setup menu).
• "Software Update" (+-Information
menu
).
2
Press
and
hold
both
CHI\
a
nd
VOL+
on
the
TV
simultaneously until
the
me
ssage
appear
s
on
the
screen.
The secret number
is
I I I
I
I·
mm
•
As a precautionary measure, make a note
of
your secret number above, and keep it in a safe place.
Page 55
Specifications
Item
Model:
LC-70LE857U
Model:
LC-60LE857U
Modei:LC-701.E757U/
LC-701.E755UILC-70C7500U
LCD
Size
7CJ'
Cl
ass
(69
1
/,"
Diagonal)
6rJ'
Cl
ass
(60
'1
32
"
Dia
go
nal)
7CJ'
Class
(6
9
1
/
2
"
Dia
go
naQ
panel
Resoluti
on
2,07
3,
600
pixels
(1
,
920
x
1,080)
TV-
standard
(CCIR
)
American
TV
Standard
ATSC/NTSC
System
VHF/UHF
VHF
2-1
3ch,
UHF
14-69ch
CATV
1-135ch
(non
-scrambled
channel
on
ly)
TV
Receiving
Digital
Terr
estrial
Function
Channel
Broa
dcast
(
8VSB)
2-69ch
Oig
~
al
ca
ble*1
1-135ch
(n
on-sc
rambled
channel
o
nly
)
(64/256
QAM)
Audio
mu~iple
x
BTSCSystem
Audio out
10W
X
2 + 15W
(WF)
HDMIIN 1
HDMI
in
with
HDCP,
ARC
HDMIIN2
HDMI
in
w~h
HDCP,
Audio
in
(0
3
.5
mm
ste
reo
jack)
Bac
k
panel
HDMIIN 3
HDMI
in
with
HOCP
v
ertical
HDMIIN 4
HDMI
in
with
H
OCP
,
MHL
inputs
AUDIO
O
UT
Audio out (0 3.5
mm
stereo jack)
USB
1*2
Photo/MusicNideo
mode,
Softw
ar
e update,
USB
keyboard/mou
se,
W
allpap
er
Pi
cture
COMPON
E
NT
IN
C
OMP
O
NENT
in
VIDEO
IN
1
AVin
Terminal
s
Back
panel
VIDEO
IN
2
AVin
s
urface
inputs
PC
IN
ANALOG
RGB
(
PC
)
in
(15-pin
m
ini
0-
sub
fem
al
e connector
).
Audio
in
(0 3.5
mm
stereo
jack)
RS-2
32C
9-pin 0-sub
male
connector
ANT
/
CABLE
75
Q
Unbalance
,
F
Ty
pe
X
1
for
Analog
(VHF
/UH
F/C
ATV)
and
Dig~al
(
AIR/
C
ABL
E)
AUDIO
IN
Audi
o
in
(0 3.5 mm
stereo
jack)
Back
p
ane
l
DI
GITAL
AUDIO
OUT
Optical
Digital
au
dio
out
x 1 (PCM!Dolby Oigita
i/O
T
S)
horizont
al
inputs
ETHERNET
Network connector
USB
2
*2
Photo/MusicNideo
mode,
Software update,
U
SB
keyboard/mouse,
Wa
ll
paper
Picture
OSD
language
English/French/Spanish
Power
Requirement
AC
120 V,
60H
z
On
Mode
Power
97W
79W
97W
Power
Consumpt
io
n
22
7W
1
87
W 2
27
W
(0.1
W
S
tardJy
with
AC
12
0
V)
(
0.
1
W
Stadly
with
AC
120
V)
(0.1
W
S
tandby
with
AC
120
V)
TV+
stand
108.0 lbs
./
49.0
kg
88.2
lbs./40.0
kg 100.3
lbs./45.5 kg
Weight
TV
only
93.
71bs
./
42.5
kg
72
.8
lbs
./33.0
kg
93.
71b
s./
42.5
kg
Dimensi
o
ns*3
TV+
stand
62
9
/,.
X
38
15
/
64
X
15
11
/
,.
54'!,
X
33
"'!,.
X
15
11
/
64
62
9
/
64
X
37
49
/
64
X
14
11
/
64
(W
x H x
D)
62
9
/
64
X
36
45
/
64
X
2
9
/
32
54
1
/
4
X
31
57
/
54
X
2
9
/
32
62
9
/
64
X
36
45
/
64
X
2
9
/
32
(in
c
h)
TV
only
Operating
temperature
+
32
°F
to
+
1
04
•f
(o
•c
to
+
4o
•c )
*1 Emergency alert messages via Cable are unreceivable.
*2
Skype
r M
is
available for
the
USB termina
l.
For details, refer
to
the following:
•
http
:/
/www.sharpusa.com (for the operation manual)
•
http
:/
/freetalk.me/productlsharp/ (for information
on
the
communication camera)
•
http:
l/
www.skype.com (for details on Skype)
*3 The dimensional drawings are shown on the inside
back
cover.
Item
Model:
LC
-
60LE757U/
Model:
LC
-
70LE657U/
Model:
LC-60LE657U
/
LC-60LE755U/LC-60C7500U
LC-70LE650UILC-70C6500U
L~E650UILC-«<C6500U
L
CD
S
iz
e
6rJ'
Class
(
60
1
/
32
"
Di
agonaQ
7
CJ'
Class
(69
1
/
2
"
Di
agonaQ
6rJ'
Class
(60
'!,,"Di
agonal)
pan
el
Resoluti
on
2,073,600 p
ixe
ls
(1,
920
x
1,080)
TV
-standard
(C
CIR)
Am
eric
an
TV
Standard
ATSC/NT
SC
Syste
m
VHF
/
UHF
VHF
2-1
3c
h, U
HF
14-69ch
CATV
1 -135ch (no
n-
scrambled channel
on
l
y)
TV
Rece
iving
Digrtal
Terrestrial
Fun
ction
Ch
annel
Broadcast
(BVS
B)
2-69ch
Digit
al
cabl
e*1
1-135ch
(no
n-scrambled
c
hann
el
o
nl
y)
(64/256
QAM
)
Audio
multiplex
BT
SC
S
ys
tem
Au
di
o o
ut
10W
x
2 + 15W
(WF)
10W
X
2
HDMIIN1 HO
MI
in
with
HOCP,
AR
C
HDMI
IN
2
HDMI
in
with
H
OC
P.
Audio
in
(0
3.5
mm
stereo jac
k)
Back
pane
l
HDMII
N3
HOM!
in
with
H
OCP
vertica
l
HDMIIN 4
HOM!
in with
HOC
P,
MHL
inp
uts
AUDIO
O
UT
Audio o
ut
(0 3.5 mm stereo jack)
USB
1*2
Photo/
Mu
sicNideo mod
e,
So
ftw
are
update,
USB
keyboard/m
ouse,
Wa
ll
pape
r
Picture
CO
M
PO
NE
NT
IN
CO
MPON
E
NT
in
V
IDE
O IN
1
AV
in
T
ermi
nals
Back
panel
VIDE
O I
N2
AV
in
surface
in
put
s
PC
IN
ANALOG
RGB
(
PC)
in
(15
-pin
mini
0-
su
b female connector).
Audio in (0 3.5
mm
stereo j
ack)
RS-
232C
9-pin 0
-su
b
ma
le
connector
A
NT
/CABLE
75
0
Un
ba
l
ance,
F
Type
x 1 f
or
An
al
og
(VHF/UH
F
/CA
TV)
and
D
ig
~
a
l
(AIR/CA
BL
E)
AUDIO
IN
Audio
in
(0
3.5 mm stereo j
ack)
B
ack
pan
el
DIG
IT
AL
AU
DIO
Olff
Optical Di
gita
l a
ud
io out x 1
(PCM/Oolby
Digit
ai
/OTS)
ho
rizo
ntal
in
puts
ETH
ERNET
Network
conn
ec
tor
USB
2*2
Ph
oto/MusicNideo
mode,
So
ftw
are
update,
USB
keyboard/mouse,
Wa
ll
paper
Picture
OSO
l
ang
uage
Englis
h/French/Spani
sh
Power
Req
ui
re
ment
AC
120
V,
60
Hz
On Mode
Power
7
9W
98W
85 W
Pow
er
Consumption
18
7W
228W
188W
(0.1
W
StandJy
with
AC
120
V)
(0
.1 W
Stand
by
with
AC
120
V)
(0
.1 W
Standby
with
AC
120
V)
TV+
stand
79.
4
lbs
./
36.0
kg
82.7 lbs
./
37
.5 kg
61.7 l
bs
./
28.0
kg
Weigh
t
TV
only
71
.7
1b
s./32.5
kg 7
6.
1 lbs./34.5 kg
55.1 lbs./25.0
kg
Dim
ensions*3
TV
+ stand
54
1
/ ,
X
32
61
/,.
X
14
11
/
64
62
"'!
64
X
38
19
/
64
X
14
11
/
64
54
19
/,.
X
33
1
/
2
X
14
11
/
04
(W
x H x D)
54
1
/
4
X
31
57
/
64
X
2
9
/
32
62
39
/
64
X
37
21
/
64
X
3
9
/
32
54
19
/
,.
X
32
17
/,
X
3
1
/
32
Onch)
TV
o
nl
y
Operating
temperature
+
3
2°
F
to
+
1
04
•f
to
•c
to
+
4o•
q
•
As
part of poli
cy
of
continuous improvement,
SHARP
reserves
th
e right to make design and specification changes
for product i
mp
rovement wi
tho
ut p
ri
or
no
tic
e. The performance spec
ifi
ca
tion figures indicated are nominal values
of
production units. There
may
be
so
me deviations from these values in i
nd
ividual
un
i
ts
.
• On
Mode Power Consumption
is
meas
ur
ed
a
cco
rding
to
Energy Star
pr
ogram requirements
fo
r
te
levisions.
® - 53
Page 56
Specifications
Wireless LAN
This TV has received the following certifications.
-
Wi-Fi
CERTIFIED™
(certification program from
the
Wi-Fi
Alliance")
-
Wi-Fi
Protected
SetupTM
(certification program
from
the
Wi-Fi
Alliance'")
FCC
This
device complies with part 15 of the
FCC
Rules.
Operation
is
subject
to
the following two conditions:
(1)
This device may not
cause
harmful
interference,
and
(2)
this device must accept any interference
received,
including
interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
To
comply with the
FCC
RF
exposure compliance requirements, this device
and
its
antenna must not be co-located or operated
in
conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter.
The
device for the band 5150-5250 MHz
is
only for indoor
usage
to reduce potential for harmful interference to cochannel mobile satellite systems;
The
maximum antenna
gain
permitted
(for
devices
in
the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725
MHz)
to comply with
the e.i.r.p.
limit; and High-power radars
are
allocated
as
primary
users
(meaning they
have
priority)
of the bands 5250-
5350
MHz and 5650-5850
MHz
and these radars could cause interference and/or damage to
lE-lAN
devices.
COFETEL
This
equipment operates
on
a secondary
basis
and,
consequently, must accept harmful interference, including
from
station
of
the
same
kind, and may not cause
harmful
interference to systems operating
on
a primary
basis.
CONTAINS
TRANSMITTER
MODULE
COFETEL
ID:
RCPSHTW11-1252
Brand:
SHARP
Model: TWFM-B005D
Specification
Standard
IEEE
802.11
alb/gin
Frequency Band
2412-2484
MHz
5150-5850
MHz
Static
WEP
(64/128 bit
key
Index 1
only)
Security
WPA-PSK
(TKIP)
WPA2-PSK
(AES)
DBPSK@1
Mbps
DQPSK@2Mbps
CCK@5.5/11
Mbps
Modulation
BPSK@6/9
Mbps
QPSK@12/18Mbps
16-QAM@24Mbps
64-QAM@48/54Mbps and above,
Rx
up
to 300Mbps
®-54
Bluetooth
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Notes on Radio Wave Certification in the U.S.A. and Canada
This
device complies with part
15
of the
FCC
Rules.
Operation
is
subject to the following two conditions:
(1)
This
device
may
not
cause
harmful
interference, and
(2)
this device must accept
any
interference
received,
including
interference that
may
cause
undesired operation.
"This
transmitter must not
be
co-located or operated
in
conjunction with
any
other anntenna or transmitter."
FCC/INDUSTRY
CANADA
NOTICE
This device complies
with
Part
15
of
FCC
Rules
and Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS
standard(s).
Operation
is
subject to the following two conditions:
(1)
this device may not cause interference,
and
(2)
this device must accept
any
interference, including interference that
may
cause undesired operation of this device.
This equipment complies with
FCC/IC
radiation exposure limits set forth for
an
uncontrolled environment
and
meets
the
FCC
radio frequency
(RF)
Exposure Guidelines
in
Supplement C to
OET65
and
RSS-1
02
of the
IC
radio frequency
(RF)
Exprosure
rules.
This
equipment
has
very
low
levels
of
RF
energy that
are
deemed to comply without testing of
specific absorption ratio
(SAR).
FCC
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by
Hosiden responsible for compliance could
void
the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
Note:
This
equipment
has
been
tested
and
found to comply with the limits for a
Class
B digital device, pursuant to
Part
15
of the
FCC
Rules.
These
limits
are
designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful
interference
in
a residential installation.
This
equipment generates, uses
and
can
radiate radio frequency
energy
and,
if not installed
and used
in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,
there
is
no
guarantee that interference
will
not occur
in
a particular installation.
If
this equipment does cause
harmful
interference to
radio
or
television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and
on,
the user
is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
_
Reorient
or relocate the
receiving
antenna.
_Increase
the separation between the equipment
and
receiver.
_Connect
the equipment into
an
outlet
on
a circuit different from that to which the receiver
is
connected.
_ Consult the dealer or
an
experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This
Class
B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003
Le
present appareil est conforme
aux
Ia
prtie 15 des
regles
de
Ia
FCC
et
CNR
d'lndustrie
Canada
applicables
aux
appareils radio exempts
de
licence.
L'exploitation est autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1)
l'appareil
ne
doit
pas produire de brouillage,
et
(2)
l'uitilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique
subi,
meme
si
le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le
fonctionnement.
Get equipement est conforme
aux
limites d'exposition aux rayonnements enoncees pour
un
environnement
non
controle
et
respecte
les
regles
les
radioelectriques
(RF)
de
Ia
FCC
lignes directrices d'exposition dans
le
Supplement C
a
OET65
et d'exposition
aux
frequences radioelectriques
(RF)
CNR-1
02
de I'IC.
Get
equipement emet
une
energie
RF
tres faible qui est consideree conforme
sans
evaluation
du
debit d'absorption specifique
(DAS).
Get appareil numerique de
Ia
classe
B est conforme a
Ia
norme NMB-3 du
Canada.
Notas sobre Ia Certificaci6n
de
Radiodifusion en Mexico
COFETEL:
RCPSHDB12-1487
Nombre de
Ia
marca
del
modulo con licencia: SHARP
CORPORATION
Nombre
de
modele
del
modulo con
licencia:
DBUB-S705
Modulo ARC0517 instalado adentro de esta gafas
PRECAUCI6N
"La
operacion de este equipo esta sujeta a
las
siguientes des condiciones:
(1)
es
posible que este equipo o dispositive
no cause interferencia
pe~udicial
y
(2)
este equipo o dispositive debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo
Ia
que
pueda causar
su
operacion no deseada.'
Numero
de
licencia
para
Ia
certificaci6n
de
radiodifusi6n
Estados Unidos
CONTAINS
FCC
ID:
VIYARC0517
Canada
CONTAINS
IC:
7305A-ARC0517
Specification
Ver.
name
I
Ver.
3.0+EDR
profile
name
I
HID
Page 57
Trademarks
• SmartCentral
is a registered trademark
of
Sharp Corporation.
•
Products that have
earned
the
ENERGY
STAR
8
are designed
to
protect the environment through superi
or
energy efficiency.
•
Manufactured under
license
from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby
and
the
double-D symbol
are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
•
The terms
HDMI
and
HDMI
High-Definition
Multimedia Interface,
and
the
HDMI
Logo are trademarks
or
registered trademarks
of
HDMI Licensing
LLC
in the United States and other countries.
• Divxe, DivX
Certified
8
,
DivX
Plus•
HD
and associated
logos
are trademarks
of
Rovi Corporation
or
i
ts
subsidiaries and are used under
license.
•
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED
Logo is a certification mark
of
the Wi-Fi
Alliance.
•
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup
Mark
is a mark
of
the
Wi-Fi
Alliance.
• DLNA
8
,
the DLNA Logo and DLNA
CERTIFIEDTM
are trademarks, service marks,
or
certification marks of
the
Digital
Living Network Alliance.
• This product
includes
DLNA Software 'DiXi
M'
developed
by
DigiOn, Inc.
•
L
C
7
:t
/
t-.
L
C
F
0
NT
.
IJII~-7
:t
/
t-
and
LC logo
mark are registered trademarks
of
SHARP
Corporation.
This product is embedded with
LC
Font
technology,
which was
developed
by
SHARP Corporation
for
clearly displaying
easy-to-read characters
on
LCD screens. However, other fonts are used
for
some screen
pages,
too
.
• 'x.v.Color'
and
x.
v.Color
are trademarks
of
Sony Corporation.
• ABOUT
DIVX
VIDEO: Divxe
is a
digital
vi
deo
format created
by
DivX,
UC,
a subsidiary
of
Rovi Corporation.
This is an official
DivX
Certified•
device
that
plays
DivX video. Visit divx.com for more information and
software
tools
to
convert your
files
into DivX videos.
• ABOUT
DIVX
VIDEO-ON-DEMAND:
This DivX Certified
8
device must
be
registered in order
to
play
purchased DivX Video-on-Demand
(VOD)
movies. To obtain your registration code,
locate
the
DivX
VOD
section in your device setup menu. Go
to
vod.divx.com for more information on
how
to
complete
your
registration.
•
Netflix and the Netflix
logo
are
the
registered trademarks
of
Netflix, Inc.
•
VUDUTM
is. a trademark
of
VUDU,
Inc.
• SkyperM,
the Skype
Logo
and
the
S
logo
and other marks indicated
on
these instructions are trademarks
of
Skype Limited
or
other
related
companies.
•
Manufactured under
license
under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,487
,5
35
&
other U.S. and
worldwi
de
patents issued
&
pending. DTS, the Symbol,
&
DTS
and the
Symbol
tog
e
th
er
are registered
trademarks
&
DTS
2.0+D
ig
it
al Out
is a trademark
of
DTS,
Inc.
Product
includes
so
ftw
are.
©
DTS
, Inc. All
Rights Reserved.
•
MHL
,
the
MHL
Logo, and
Mob
ile
High-Definition Li
nk
are trademarks
or
regi
ste
r
ed
tr
ademarks of MHL LLC
in the United States and other countries.
•
MHLTM
•
The
Bluetooth
8
word
mark
and
logos
are registered trademarks owned
by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and any use
of
such marks
by
SHARP Corporation is under
license.
Other trademarks and trade names are those
of
their respective owners.
®-55
Page 58
Calling
for
Service
For
location
of
the nearest
Sharp
Authorized Service, or
to
obtain
product
literature,
accessories,
supplies,
or
customer assistance, please caii1-800-BE-SHARP.
LIMITED
WARRANTY
CONSUMER LIMITED
WARRANTY
SHARP ELECTRONICS CORPORATION
warrants
to
the first consumer purchaser that this
Sharp
brand
Uquid
Crystal Display product
(the "Product"), when shipped in
its
original container,
will
be
free from defective
wor1<manship
and materials,
and agrees that
~will,
at
ijs
option, either repair the defect
or
replace the defective Product or part thereof wijh
a
new
or remanufactured equivale
nt
at
no
charge to the purchaser for parts or labor for the
period(s)
set
forth below.
This warranty does not apply to any appearance
ijems
of
the Product or
~
the
serial
number
or
model number
affi
xed to the Product
has
been
removed,
defaced, changed, altered or tampered
wijh.
This
warranty
does
not cover installation or signal reoeption problems.
This
lim~ed
warranty
will
not apply
~
the Product
has been
or is being used in a commercial setting
or
application; this warranty is meant
soely
for
the
non-commercial, household use
of
the Product by consumers
in
their home or residence.
~you
intend
to
or
already use this Product
for commercial purposes or in a commercial setting, there
are
warranties
available
to cover your use of this Product, the terms
of
which
may
vary.
Please contact
1 -888-GO-SHARP
for further information.
In order
to
enforce your rights under this limited warranty, you should follow the steps set forth below. You must
be
able
to
provide
proof
of
purchase
to
the
servicer, which proof must include the date of purchase.
To
the extent permitted by
app
licable state law, the warranties set forth are in lieu of, and
ex
clusive of,
all
other warranties, express
or implied. Specifically
All.
OTHER
WARRANTlES
OTHER
THAN
THOSE SET FORTH ABOVE
ARE
EXCLUDED, ALL
EXPRESS
AND
IMPLIED
WARRANTlES
INCLUDING
THE
WARRANTIES
OF
MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR USE,
AND
FITNESS
FOR
A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE
SPECIFICALLY EXCLUDED. IF, UN
DER
APPLICABLE
STATE
LAW,
IMPLIED
WARRANTlES MAY
NOT
VALIDLY
BE
DISCLAIMED OR EXCLUDED,
THE DURATION OF SUCH IMPLIED WARRANTIES
IS
LIMITED TO
THE
PERI
OD(S)
FROM
THE DATE
OF
PURCHASE
SET FORTH BELOW
. THIS
WARRANTY
GIVES
YOU SPECIFIC
UEGAL
RIGHTS. YOU
MAY
ALSO
HAVE
OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM
STATE
TO STATE.
The
warranties
given
herein
shall
be
the
sole
and
exdusive
warranties
granted
by
Sharp
and
shall
be t
he
so
le
and
exclusive
remedy
avai
l
able
to
the
purdhaser
and
on
ly
for the time periods
se
t
forth
herein
.
No
other
representations
or
promises
made
by
anyone
are
permitted.
Correc
ti
on
of
defects,
in
the
manner
and for the
period
of
time
described
herein,
shal
l
const~ute
complete
fulfi
ll
ment
of
all
liabilities
and
respo
ns
i
b
i
l~ies
of
Sharp
to
the
purdhaser
w~h
respect to the Product,
and
shall
constitute
full
satisfaction
of
all
claims,
whether
based
on
contract,
neg
l
igence,
strict
liability
or
otherwise.
Sharp
does
not warrant nor
shall
Sharp
be
liable,
or
in
any
way
responsible,
for Products wh
ich
have
been
subject
to
abuse
Qncl
udi
ng
,
but
not
~mijed
to, improper vol
tage),
accident,
misuse
, negl
igence
, lack of
reasonable
care,
alteration,
modbtion,
tampering,
misuse
, improper
opera
tion
or
maintenance
or
any
damages
or
defects
in
the
Produc
t
which
were
caused
by
repairs
or attempted
repairs
performed
by
anyone
other
than
a
Sharp
authorized
servicer.
Nor
shall
Sharp
be
liable
or
in
any
way
respons
ible for
any
incidental or
consequential
economic
or property
damage.
Some
states
do
not
al
low
li
mits
on
warranties
or on
remedies
for
breach
in
certain
transactions;
in
such states,
the
limits
herein
may
not
apply.
THIS LIMITED
WARRANTY
IS
VALID
ONLY
IN
THE
AFTY
(50)
UNITED
STATES,
THE
DISTRICT
OF COLUMBIA
AND
PUERTO
RICO.
Model Specific Section
Your Product
Model
Number
&
Description:
Warranty Period
for
this
Product
Additional Exclusions
from
Wammty
Coverage
(If
any):
Where
to
Obtain
Service:
What
to
do
to
Obtain Service:
LC-70LE857U/LC-60LE857U/LC-70LE757U/LC-60LE757U/LC-70UE755U/
LC-60UE755U/LC-70UE657U/LC-60LE657U/LC-70LE650UILC-60UE650UI
LC-70C7500U/LC-60C7500U/LC-70C6500U/LC-60C6500U
LCD
Color
Television
(Be
sure
to
have this information available when you
need
service for your
Product.)
One
(1)
year parts and labor from
the
da
te
of
purchase.
In order for the Produ
ct
to
be serviced, the Product must be readily available
to
the servicer, free and clear
of
any
comp
lex
or
non-standard installation, mounting
or
other encumbrance which would unreasonably interfere
with
servicing the
Product. The Servicer will remount
the
Product after servi
ce
, provided that such
rennounting is not into a complex
or
non-standard installation. Any
add~
i
onal
labor and materials required to remove and/or reinstall a Product above
and
beyond the foregoing are not covered by this warranty, may
resu~
in additional
charges and are
the
responsibility
of
the
co
nsumer.
Image
Retention
resulting
from
a fixed image being displayed for lo ng
periods
of time
is
not
covered
by
this
Um~ed
Warranty
(see
Operation
Manual
on
how
to
preve
nt
this).
From a
Sharp
Authorized Servicer
loca
ted
in
the
United
States. To find the
location
of
the nearest
Sharp
Authorized Servicer, please call
Sharp
t
ol
l
free
at
1-800-BE-SHARP.
Contact your
Sharp
Authorized Servicer
to
obtain in home service for this
product. The
Servicer
will come
to
your
location and if necessary
remove
the
un~
for
repair at the
Servicer's facilijy
and return
the
set to you once completed.
Be
sure
to
have Proof
of
Purchase available.
TO
OBTAIN
PRODUCT
INFORMATION
OR
PURCHASE
ACCESSORIES
AND
EXTENDED
WARRANTIES
,
CALL
1-800-BE-SHARP
® -
56
OR
VISIT
www.sharpusa.com
~,..----SHARPe----
....
LIMITED
WARRANTY
Consumer Bectronics Products
Congratulations
on
your
purchase!
Sharp
Electronics of
Canada
Ltd.
("
Sharpj
warrants
to
the
first purchaser for this
Sharp
brand
product
("Produ
ct
;,
when
shipped
in
~s
original
container
and
sold
or distributed
In
Canada
by
Sharp
or by
an
authorized
Sharp
dealer
,
and
Product
was
not
sold
"as
is" or
"sales
final"
that the Product
will
during
the
applicable
warranty
period,
be
free
from
defects
in
material
and
wo
rkmanship,
and
will
within
t
he
applicable warranty
period,
e~her
repa
ir
the
defective
Product
or
provide
the
first
purchaser
a
replacemen
t of the defective
Product.
Conditions: This
lim~ed
warranty
shall
not
apply
to:
(a)
Any
defects
caused
or
repairs required
as
a
res
utt
of
abusive operation,
negligence,
accident,
imp
roper
installation
or
inappropri
ate
us
e
as outlined in the owner's
manual
or other
appl
icab
le
Product documentation.
(b)
Any defects
caused
or
repairs
required
as
a
resu~
of
any
Prod
uct that
has
been
tampered
w~
h.
modified,
adj
usted
or
repaired
by any
person other
than
Sharp,
a
Sharp
authorized
service
centre
or
a Sharp authorized
servicing
dealer.
(c)
Any
defects
caused
or
repairs
required
as
a
result
of the
use
of the Product
with
items not specified or
approved
by
Sharp,
includ
i
ng
but
not
lim~ed
to,
head
cleaning
tapes
and
chemical
cl
ean
i
ng
agents.
(d)
Any
replacement of accessories,
glassware,
consumab
le
or
paripheral
~ems
required
t
hrough
normal
use
of t
he
Product
, incl
uding
but
not
lim
~ed
to,
earphones
,
remote
controls,
AC
adapters, batteries, temperature probe,
trays,
filters,
be
~s
.
ri
bbons,
cab
les
and
paper.
(e)
Any
cosmetic
damage
to the
Produc
t
surface
or exterior that
has
been
defaced or
caused
by
normal
wear
and
tear.
(1)
Any
defects caused or
repairs
required
as
a
resu~
of
damage
caused
by any external or environmental
cond
itions,
i
ncluding
but
not
limited
to,
transmissi
on
line/power
line v
oltage
or
liquid spillage
or
acts
of
God
.
(g)
Warranty
claims for Products
returned
with
illegible
or without appropriate
model,
serial
number
and
CSA/c
UL
m
arki
ngs.
(h)
Any
Products
used
for
rental
or
commet"Cial
purposes.
(i)
Any
Installation,
setup
and/or
programming
charges.
How
to
get
service:
Warranty
seovice
may
be
obtained
upon
de"vety
of
the
Product, together
with
proof of
purchase
~nc
l
uding
dale
of
purchase)
and
a copy of this
lim~ed
warranty
statement,
to
an
authorized
Sharp
service
centre
or
an
authorized
Sharp
servicing
dea
ler. In
home
warranty
service
will
be
carried
out
to
locations accessible
by on-road
service
vehic
le
and
w~hin
50
km
of
an
authorized
Sharp
service
centre
on
any
Sharp
Television
with
t
he
screen
size
of
42"
or
larger
and
on
any
Sharp
Over-The-Range
Microwave
Oven
or
Home
Use
Microwave
Drawer
.
No
other
person (including
any
Sharp
dealer
or
servk:e centre)
is
authorized
to
extend
,
en
large
or
transfer
this
warran
ty
on
beha
lf
of
Sharp
.
The
purchaser
will
be
responsible
for
any
and
all
removal,
reinstallation,
transportation
and
insurance
costs
incurred.
The
express
warranties
in
this
li
mited
warranty are,
except
for
consumer
purchasers
domiciled
in
Quebec
,
in
lieu
of
and,
except
to t
he
extent prohibited by applicable law,
Sharp disclaims
all
other
warranties
and conditions,
express
or
impli
ed
,
whether
aris
i
ng
by
law
, statute,
by
course of
dealing
or
usage
of trade,
Incl
uding,
without limitation, imp
li
ed warranti
es
or
cond~ions
of m
erchantabi
lity
and/or
quality,
fitness
for a particular
use
or
purpose
, and/or
non
-infringement.
Limitations
(not
applicable
to
consumer
purc
hasers
dom
iciled
in
Quebec
to the extent
proh
i
b~ed
under
Quebec
law
):
(a)
Sharp
shal
l
not be
li
able
for
any
incident
al,
special, consequential,
economic,
exemp
lary
or
ind
irect damages
of
any
kind or natura
~ncl
uding
lost profits or
damages
f
or
loss
of
time or
loss
of
use
or l
oss
of data)
arising
from
or
in
any
co
nnection
with
the
use
or
performance
of
a
Product
or
a
failure
of
a
Product,
even
ff
Sharp
is
aware of
or
has
been
adv
ised
of
the
possibility of
such
damages;
(b)
t
he
remedies
described
In
this
llm~ed
wa
rranty constitute complete
fulfillment
of
all
obligations
and
rasponsibllftles
of
Sharp
to the purchaser
with
respect to the
Produ
ct
and
shall
const~ute
full satisfaction of a
ll
claims
,
whether
based
on
contract,
negligence,
strict
liability
or
otherw~e
.
Some
provinces
may
not
aiJow
the
exclusion
or
limitation
of certain damages,
or
limits
on
the
duration
or
vo
i
ding
of
implied
warranties
or
conditions; in
such
provinces,
the
exclusions
and
limits
herein
may
not
apply.
Th
is
l
imi
t
ed
warranty is,
except
for
cons
umer
purchasers
domiciled
in
Quebec,
governed
by
the
laws
of
the
Provi
nce
in
Ca
nada in w
hich
the
purc
h
aser
has
purchased the Product.
For
consumer
purchasers
domici
led
In
Quebec
this
ll
m~ed
warranty
is
governed by
the
laws
of Q
uebec
.
WARRANTY
PERIODS
(calculated
from
the
date
of
original purchase): Parts
&
Labour
(exceptions noted)
Aud
io
Product
1
year
Bl
u-Ray
Product 1
year
Projector
1
year
Pomp
90
days
)
LCDlV
1
year
Mi
crowave
Oven
1
year
(magnetron
component-4
additional
years)
Air Purifier
1
year
Portable
Air
Conditione
r
1
year
Plasmacluster
lon
Generator 1
year
3D
Glasses 1 year
Wireless
LAN Adapt..-
1
year
To
obtain
th
e
name
and
address
of
the
nearest Authorized Sharp Service Centre
or
Dealer,
or
for
m
ore
information
on
this
Limited Warranty,
Sharp Extended Warranty Offers, Sharp
Canada
Products
or
Accessory Sales, please
contact
Sharp:
•
By
writing
to
Sharp
Electronics
Of
Canada
Ltd. at
335
Britannia
Road
East
Missfssauga,
Ontario
L4Z
1 W9
• Calling:
at
905-568-
7140
• Visiting
our
Web
sfte:
www.oharp,.,.
THIS LIMITED
WARRANTY
IS VALID
ONLY
IN
CANADA
Revision
01/01/12
Page 59
Dimensional
Drawings
LC-70LE857U
r---
__
6
29/
64
(1578)
___
___,
-- ---
---
- -
---
-
.i-
--
--- -
---
----
-
25
13
f64
(640)
LC-60LE857U
54'1•
(1378)
I
i
·1 Active
ar
ea/
Area act iva/Zone active
•2
Thinnest
parVParte
ma
s
de
lgada/Partie
Ia
plus min
ce
;;;
~
!
0
"
1
,,,.
(2
8
(2
41
9/64
L
j 1
09
)
•3
Incl
ud
ing
projecting
pa
rts/l
nc
luyendo
partes salientes/Parties
sai
ll
an
tes incluses
LC-70LE757U/LC-70LE755U/LC-70C7500U
a;
~
~
~
~~,
~~
~
~
~
1
~5
3=
8-
~
8
8
~r1
~
l
--
4-
-
-~
~
~
!
.,
__ __ __ __ __ _
L
__ __
--
---
=
I
r
~
'
~
~
~
I
;;;.n
~
I
~
~
~
!I
L.
25
,,,.
(
64.Q
U
1
,,
.., (2
8!"
2
1
" 1
64
(44)
-
2
9
/~
(5
8)"
3
6 25/
64
(162)
14
11
/
..
(
3601
1
LC-60LE757U/LC-60LE755U/LC-60C7500U
r-
--·
·
--
54
_'
1•
(
137
~l
___
_ _
r-
.-
!
I
;::
J
5
2"
1
32
(1329
.1
2).,1
1
~
"'
~
~
~
~
____ __ __ _ j _
___
l _ __ _
I
~
~
~
I
;J
~
c;;
,
I
~·s
i
i
-
~
i
;;;~
1
l
'
N~.
__
~
-
-
1
'164
(28
l
L
1
"164
(44)
2
.,,
(58r3
4 1
9/
64
. ...
1-
;
_(1(l9
).
..1--J.
_
Unit:
inc
h (mm)
Unite:
po
uce (
mm
)
Unidad: pulgada (mm)
Page 60
Dimensional
Drawings
LC-70LE657U/LC-70LE650U/LC-70C6500U
--
1
'
i_
so
'
'132115
~
~
~
8)'1
5
1
/e
(130)
7
9f16
(192)
AN-52AG4
LC-60LE657U/LC-60LE650U/LC-60C6500U
54
" '
"'
(1379)
1
'
'
"~8
:
2
I
/
413'
-·_·
LL
_j1_2
_
2)
_
6
15
/
16
II
.
_l1_7L_
_
~I
-
AN-52AG4
'1
Active area/ Area activa/Zone active
'2
Thinnest part/Parte mas
delgada/Partie
Ia
plus mince
'3
In
cluding
projecting parts!lncluyendo partes salientes!Parti
es
saillantes incluses
Un
it: inch (mm)
Unite: pouce (mm)
Unidad:
pulgada
(mm)
-
-
--
~
-
~
~
-;1
N
"'
_
_j
Page 61
SHAR~
SHARP
ELECTRONICS CORPORATION
Sharp Plaza,
Mahwah,
New
Jersey
07
495-1163
SHARP CORPORATION
Printed in Mexico
lmprime
au
Mexique
lmpreso
en
Mexico
TINS-F700WJZZ
13P01-MX-NM
Page 62
SHARP.
uos
Connection Guide
Guide
Guia
de
de
Conexi6n
Connexion
TMAN-AOSOWJZZ
Page 63
Experiencing HD Images [ENGLISH]
In
order to
programming.
HDTV Programming
In
order to
include
just
an
There
view
the
highest
You
must
view
the
best possible picture,
HD
programming,
ordinary
are
3
1)
Off-Air
able
http://www.antennaweb.org.
2)
Cable
cable company
In
programming
3)
Satellitereceiver
TV.
primary
antenna
to
receive
-
some
ways
Cable
cases,
Satellite
and
appropriate
the
quality
get
HD
if
you
to get
(antenna
HD
signals
customers
(HD
cable
Networks
cable
customers
picture
programming
have
HD
content:
sold
off-air
will
box required-
(e.g.
channels
hardware
on
you
not
already
separately-
and
need
will
to subscribe to
CBS,
using
need
required
your
HDT\1,
to get
will
need
done
using
for
help
additional
NBC,
ABC,
a direct
to subscribe to
you
an
HD
to
so.
the
choosing
PBS)
cable
-
additional
need
picture.
upgrade
An
HDTV
RF
antenna
the
HDTV
monthly
programming
may
feed
HDTV
monthly
High-Definition
your
current
without
input).
right
antenna,
subscription
be
available
into
the
programming
service
lV
an
To
from
digital
HD
fee
(HD)
service
source
see
visit
may
in
HD
tuner.
(HD
may
\
if
you
your
apply).
by
satellite
apply).
to
is
are
.
local
Note:
today's
difference
further
are
Types
The
r
Note:
•
•
If
DO
CONTACT
Digital
analog
details.
on
different
of
best
image
HDMI
Component
Composite
Composite
For
connecting
To
purchase
1-87-
you
are
NOT
i)
ii)
SEE
experiencing
TAKE
Toll
Sharp
through
holidays.
Internet
cable
by
subscribing to
or
digitaJ
TV
signal,
HDTV
channels.
and
Connection
quality
BEST
GOOD
the
cables
AQUOS
IT
SHARP
Free
1-800-BE-SHARP
personnel
Friday,
at
is
BETTER
video,
TV
and
(1-877 -332-7867).
any
BACK
ELECTRONICS
http://www.sharpusa.com/CustomerSupport.aspx
satellite
but most of
HDTV
today's
obtained
(Provides
(Component
Composite)
(Analog
and
Analog
to
external
other accessories direct
difficulty
TO
THE
are
available
and
from
is
not
necessarily
these
programming!
analog
by
using
the
connection RF
equipment,
in
the
STORE
AT:
(237
at
9
AM
channels
channels,
a
best video/audio
cables
(ANT-
operation
WHERE
-4277)
this number
to 7
PM
HDTV.
are
Contact your
even
digital
NTSC)
source
provide
Not
preferred)
cannot display
use
commercially
from
or
setup
PURCHASED.
from
Central
The
not
HDTV.
cable
though
better
Sharp,
7
time
they
and
digital
performance)
picture
pleaSe
of this
AM
to 7
on
Saturdays,
picture
You
will
or
satellite
may
connections:
performance
HDTV
available
call:
unit,
please:
PM
quality
be
able
be
the
signals.
cables
Central
Sundays
is
superior to
to
tell
the
provider
same
and
time Monday
for
network,
than
adapters.
and
Page 64
•
For
connecting
•
To
view
Connecting
Check
the type
(for receiving
off·air HD1V
1.
A
75
-ohm system
a round
connector
attached
tools (commercially
2.
A
300-ohm
"twin-lead" cable
attached
through a
(commercially available).
3.
A separate VHF/UHF antenna
has
two
a combiner
available)
antenna cables
terminal.
E
For information
external
of
cable-1V
broadcasts)
cable
with F-type
that
can
to
a
terminal
system
to
a
75-ohm
300/75-ohm
antenna
(commercially
to
connect the
to
the
source
an
antenna
is
easily
available).
is
that can
cables.
a
on
TV
to
external equipment, use
images,
select
the
input
Antenna/Cable
cable
you are using.
without a set-top box,
generally
be
without
a
flat
be
terminal
adapter
Use
75-ohm
the antenna type, see the operation manual
including unscrambled cable
75-ohm
coaxial
cable
(round)
·ohm
300
twin-lead cable
commercially
source
by
pressing
of
your
TV.
available cables.
INPUT
HD
channels,
or
on
the
remote
Connecting
•
When using HOM
The
HDMI
an
audio-video
and
video
supports
E
control
(High
Definrtion
interlace
signals
using
high-resolution
Cable
When
you
connect
terminal.
unit
or
an
HD
I cable
Multimedia
that
enables
a
single
cable.
video
input.
,__...;..
ARC
-compatible equipment,
________
on
the
TV.
Cable/Satellite
(HOM
I IN
1,
2,
terminal
IN
terminal
use
3
is
Interlace)
a connection for audio
The
HDMI
Set-top
or
4):
..
lllllll!l
the
HDMIIN 1
I
ENGLISH
Box
Back
panel
vertical
inputs
I
Connecting
You
can use the
VIDEO
Cable
Connecting
Connecting
Cables
You
using a splitter only
the connection involves a
cable set-top box. When
you use the
set-top box, connect a
dedicated cable directly
the
an
HD
required:
CD
Coaxial cable
0
HDMI-certified cable
(}) Optical
fiber
@)
03.5
mm
stereo minijack
audio
cable
Cable
can
connect the
satellite
satellite
set-top box.
cable
a
Cable/Satellite
IN
terminal
with a
Multiple
Cable/Satellite
.J£..q.l
TV
when
to
Devices
Set-top
to
RCA
Splitter
l-8111f--....;;
CD
HD
Satellite
set-top box
Cable/
Set-top
component
to
Box,
Blu-ray
CD
;;_
cable.
the
__
Box
Back
surface inputs
TV
Disc/DVD
Back
horizontal
IIIIICII--+
a
@][~]
ANTIC'Bl£
vertical
panel
Player
Back
panel
inputs
0
DIGITAL
A.UOIOOUT
panel
inputs
and
~
Amplifier
Connecting
Cables
required:
CD
Coaxial cable
0
Composite
a
Cable/Satellite
cable
AUDIO·R
When connecting the
TV without the use
a
top
antenna cable
RF-IN
VCR.
(Red)
Set-top
cable/satellite
box, connect the
terminal on the
Box
to
set-
the
and
of
VCR
@J\
ANTICABLE
Back
surface
Y
panel
inputs
(Green)
(})
II
'------1
E
The above
TV,
The
illustrations
--@1
---==:.@]
is
a connection example. For.information on connecting extemal equipment
see the operation manual of the
of
the
:=,~-It
DIGITAL
AUDKJ
terminals
@]
@]
TV
c~
'::"1
·~
equipment.
are
for
c{]]JJJI)
•
~··
explanation
•o
!······
purposes
@)
.............
I
or
I
and
may
E
The above
is
TV,
Connecting
PC
.
to
the
vary
slightly
E
from
a connection example. For information on connecting external equipment to the
see the operation manual
a
PC
of
the equipment.
03.5
minijack
=
DVI-HDMI
mm
stereo
cable
=
conversion cable
':r..:.::~;;;;;;;;:'
The above
is
operation manual
the
a connection example. For detailed information on
actual
of
the equipment.
products.
tl,;~;n~;1ion,
inputs
Back
vertical
see the
panel
inputs
Page 65
SHAR~
MODEL
AN-3DG40
30
SHARP 3D
OPERATION
I ENGLISH
These 3D Glasses (AN-3DG40) are
TVs supporting 3D. For details
and to
IMPORTANT
This product contains a
Perchlorate Material - special handling may
See
GLASSES
FOR
AQUOS
MANUAL
I
only
for use with
of
how to make adjustments for 3D functions
fully
enjoy 3D viewing, refer to the operation manual
~
INFORMATION
CR
Coin Lithium Battery which contains
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
SHARP AQUOS LCD
of
apply, California
your
residents,
I
u.s
TV.
.
A.
ONLY
I
DO NOT INGEST BATTERY,
"This
is swallowed,
to death. Keep new and used batteries away from children.
compartment does not
away from children. If
placed inside any part
Printed
TINS-F777WJZZ
13P01-MX-NM
product contains a coin/button cell
it can cause severe internal burns in just 2 hours and can
in
Mexico
~WARNING
CHEMICAL
battery.
close
you think batteries might have been
of
securely, stop using the product and keep it
the body, seek immediate medical attention."
EN-1
BURN HAZARD
If
the coin/button
If
swallowed
the battery
cell
battery
lead
or
Page 66
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
(U.S.A. and Canada only)
FCC Compliance Statement
This device complies with part 15
(1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING:
FCC Regulations state that any unauthorized changes
approved by the manufacturer could void the user's authority
INFORMATION:
This equipment has been tested and found
Part 15
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not
installation. If this equipment
determined
one
- Reorient
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that
- Consult the dealer
of
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
by
turning the equipment
or
more
of
the following measures:
or
relocate the receiving antenna.
or
an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to
comply with the limits
does
cause harmful interference
off
and on, the user is encouraged
to
the following
(2)
this device must accept any interference
or
modifications
to
to
provide reasonable protection against harmful
to
to
this equipment not expressly
operate this equipment.
for
a Class 8 digital device, pursuant
occur
radio
or
television reception, which can
to
try
to
correct the interference by
to
which the receiver is connected.
two
conditions:
in
a particular
to
to
be
Industry
This Class 8 digital
Canada
Statement
apparatus
complies
with CAN
ICES-003(8)/NM8-3(8)
DEAR SHARP CUSTOMER
Thank you for your purchase
trouble-free operation of your product, please read the Important Safety Instructions carefully before using
this product.
of
the
30
Glasses for SHARP
30
AQUOS.
To
ensure safety and many years of
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Electricity
if improperly handled. This product has been engineered and manufactured with the highest priority on safety.
However, improper use can result
the following instructions when installing, operating and cleaning the product.
the service life
product.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8) Do not install near any heat sources such
is
used
to
perform many useful functions, but it can also cause personal injuries and property damage
in
electric shock and/or
of
your Liquid Crystal Television, please read the following precautions carefully before using the
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed
all
warnings.
Follow
all
instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install
as
amplifiers) that produce heat.
fire.
In
order
to
prevent potential danger, please observe
To
ensure your safety and prolong
in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including
EN-2
Page 67
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
9)
Do not defeat the safety purpose
with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has
blade
or
the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult
an
electrician for replacement
1
0)
Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and
the point where they exit from the apparatus.
11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket,
the apparatus. When a cart
avoid injury from tip-over.
13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods
all
14) Refer
in
the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed
dropped.
servicing
any way, such as power-supply cord
to
qualified service personnel. Servicing
of
the polarized
of
the obsolete outlet.
is
used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination
or
plug
or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has
two
blades and a third grounding prong. The wide
or
table specified by the manufacturer,
of
is
required when the apparatus has been damaged
is
damaged, liquid has been spilled
to
rain
or
moisture, does not operate normally,
or
sold with
time.
or
objects have fallen into
two
blades
®
to
or
has been
Prevention
• Keep the accessory out
- If a child accidentally swallows any
Do not disassemble
• Do not disassemble
glasses.
Caution for lithium battery
• Batteries must not be exposed
• Replace only with the same
•
Take
loading the battery. Loading the battery incorrectly may damage the battery or cause it
which could result
Handling the
• Do not drop, exert pressure on,
result
• Be careful not
- Pay special attention when children are using this product.
Using the
• Use
• Use the 3D Glasses only for the specified purpose.
• Do not move around while wearing the 3D Glasses. The surrounding area may appear dark, which may result
falling
Caring for the
• Use only the cloth provided with the 3D Glasses
dust or other soiling on the cloth may result
doing so may damage the coating.
• When cleaning the 3D Glasses, take care not
glasses.
• Always store the 3D Glasses
• When storing the 3D Glasses, avoid very humid or hot locations.
Viewing
• If you experience dizziness, nausea,
eyes.
• Do not use the 3D Glasses if they are cracked
of
accidental ingestion
of
the reach
or
modify the 3D Glasses except when recycling the batteries. Do not modify the 3D
to
excessive heat such as direct sunlight or fire.
or
equivalent type
care not
in
of
or
to
reverse the battery
in
a fire, injury or damage.
30
Glasses
the risk
30
the 3D Glasses should be limited
other accidents that may cause injury.
30
of
to
trap your finger
Glasses
30
Glasses
images
injury.
poles(+
or
step on the 3D Glasses. Doing so may damage the glass section, which may
in
the hinge section
in
the case provided when not
or
of
small children. Small children can accidentally swallow these parts.
of
these parts, seek immediate medical attention.
of
battery. The battery may explode if improperly replaced.
and-)
when loading the battery. Follow the correct procedure when
to
leak battery fluid,
of
the 3D Glasses. Doing so may result
to
a maximum
in
scratches. Do
to
other discomfort while viewing 3D images, discontinue use and rest your
or
of
3 hours, and
to
clean the lenses. Remove dust and soil from the cloth. Any
not
allow water
broken.
or
other fluids
in
use.
in
any case
use solvents such as benzene
to
no
come into contact with the
in
injury.
more than one movie.
or
thinners as
in
EN-3
Page 68
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Notes on Radio Wave Certification in the U.S.A. and Canada
This device complies with part 15
(1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
interference that may cause undesired operation.
of
the FCC Rules. Operation
(2)
is
subject
this device
to
the following
must
accept any interference received, including
two
conditions:
"This transmitter must not be co-located.
FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE
This device complies with Part
subject
interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets
the FCC radio frequency
(RF)
specific absorption ratio
FCC CAUTION
Changes
authority
Note: This equipment has been tested and found
Part
a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used
there
interference
encouraged
- Reorient
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
-Connect
- Consult the dealer
to
the following
Exprosure rules. This equipment has very
or
modifications
to
operate the equipment.
15
of
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
is
no guarantee that interference will not
to
radio
to
try
or
relocate the receiving antenna.
the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from
two
or
television reception, which can
to
correct the interference
or
15
conditions:
(RF)
Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C
(SAR).
not
expressly approved
an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
or
operated in conjunction with any other anntenna
of
FCC Rules and Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
(1)
this device may not cause interference, and
of
this device.
to
OET65 and RSS-1
low
levels
of
RF energy that are deemed
by
Hosiden responsible for compliance could void the user's
to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
to
radio communications. However,
occur
in
a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
be
by
one
or
more
determined
of
by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is
the following measures:
that
to
which the receiver is connected.
or
transmitter."
(2)
this device must accept any
02
of
the
IC
radio frequency
to
comply without testing
of
to
in
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003
Ia
prtie
15
des
regles
de
Ia
FCC
et
Le present appareil est conforms aux
appareils radio exempts
de
pas produire
brouillage est susceptible
Get equipement est conforms aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements enoncees
controle et respects les regles les radioelectriques
brouillage, et
a OET65 et d'exposition aux frequences radioelectriques
tres faible qui est consideree conforms sans evaluation
Get appareil numerique
Notas sobre Ia Certificaci6n
• COFETEL: RCPHOAR12-1504
de
Ia
• Nombre
• Nombre de modelo del modulo
• Modulo ARC0517 instalado adentro
marca del modulo con licencia: SHARP CORPORATION
de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes:
(2)
l'uitilisateur
d'en
compromettre le fonctionnement.
de
Ia
classe B est conforms a
de
con
de
l'appareil doit accepter
(RF)
de
Ia
FCC lignes directrices d'exposition dans le Supplement C
(RF)
CNR-102
du
debit d'absorption specifique (DAS).
Ia
norme
NMB-3
Radiodifusi6n en Mexico
licencia: ARC0517
de
esta gafas
CNR d'lndustrie Canada applicables aux
tout
brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme
de
I'IC. Get equipement emet une energie
du
Canada.
PRECAUCI6N
"La operacion
no cause interferencia perjudicial y
pueda causar su operacion no deseada."
Estados Unidos
Canada
de
este equipo esta sujeta a las siguientes
(2)
este equipo o dispositivo
de
Numero
CONTAINS FCC
CONTAINS IC: 7305A-ARC0517
licencia para
ID:
VIYARC0517
dos
condiciones:
debe
Ia
certificacion
(1)
es posible que este equipo o dispositivo
aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo
de
radiodifusion
(1)
l'appareil ne doit
pour
un environnement non
Ia
si
RF
que
le
EN-4
Page 69
Using
the
3D
Glasses
CAUTION
Some people
3DTV.
consumers can experience and
all
Not
•
prevents
programming
experience headaches, eye fatigue
seizures. Like a
The 3D Glasses are precision equipment. Handle
•
• Improper
you experience dizziness, nausea,
If
•
discontinue use
make images appear
When viewing 3D images continuously, be sure
•
you are nearsighted
If
•
left
eyesight before viewing 3D images. The 3D Glasses can be
When viewing 3D images, keep
•
3D Glasses
significantly
View 3D images
•
times
Be careful
•
closer
you accidentally
if
The 3D glasses are
•
• When children are viewing 3D images,
3D images, and
People
•
not
Do
•
goggles).
Do
•
to
When using
•
3D images
resulting
is
It
•
alcohol.
them
may
of
use
eyes, you should
right
and
with
different
effective
the
your
of
farther
or
known
a
with
3D Glasses. This can worsen existing
the
use
the
use
not
the
use
not
running
into
the
may
possible injury.
in
recommended
experience initial feelings
coaster,
roller
3D Glasses
the
3D Glasses. Using
the
of
blurry
or
respect
or
appropriate distance
the
at
height
surroundings when viewing 3D images. When you
they
than
the
hit
recommended
not
show
they
if
history
3D Glasses
function
3D
objects, tripping,
3D Glasses,
cause you
you
that
perceiving
from
the
the
or
create overlapping images.
or
farsighted
take
the
TV screen,
the
to
images
may
the
of
are. This
screen
signs
photosensitivity and people
of
other
for
3D Glasses while walking
or
take
misjudge
to
not
do
enjoy
3D entertainment. Also, some people
intended depth
motion
or
experience is
failure
TV screen.
or
of
and/or
care
to
other
or
the
astigmatism
have
or
necessary steps, such as wearing eyeglasses,
the
3D Glasses horizontally
the
appear
cause you
may
surrounding objects.
people aged less than 6.
for
sure a parent
be
discomfort,
purposes (such as general eyeglasses, sunglasses,
falling.
to
not
distance
the
3D images
view
of
motion
of
sickness. Some viewers
for
not
them
these instructions can result
follow
discomfort
with
3DTV
take
to
images viewed
overlapping.
TV screen. The recommended distance
the
from
to
immediately discontinue use
health conditions.
accidentally
to
you are sleep deprived
if
stereo blindness
from
suffer
picture. Others
the
to
adjust
sickness as
everyone.
care.
with
while viewing 3D images, immediately
incompatible 3D broadcasts
break
a
a different level
or
worn
level
misjudge
guardian
or
with
moving around. This
or
strike
TV screen and accidentally
the
they
might
periodically
eyeglasses.
over
the
with
left
the
by
view
distance
the
present.
is
problems
heart
TV screen
the
also experience epileptic
eye strain.
in
software can
or
prevent eye strain.
to
eyesight between
of
to
you
TV screen.
right
and
3D images,
and possibly result in injury
or
If
may
eyes
objects
Monitor
of
or
may
or
if
children viewing
3D Glasses.
the
poor
or
result in injuries
people. Viewing
other
strike
you have been drinking
which
watch
who
the
correct
health should
your
the
tilt
appear
three
is
appear
may
protective
screen,
the
3D
may
due
Make sure the
* Use the
following accessories are provided with the
Glasses
30
(x1)
Cleaning cloth
(x1)
Glasses nose pad as needed. The
30
NOTE
The illustrations above are for explanation purposes and may vary slightly from the actual accessories.
•
Glasses.
30
Nose pad*
large
x1,
(small
Operation manual
(this publication)
nose pad
small
EN-5
x1)
already attached.
is
Glasses case
(x1)
Page 70
Using the
Glasses
3D
4~~
~
---
NOTE
The power turns off
•
cases:
When pairing
·-
- When the 3D Glasses
for 15 seconds
~~
1-
Nose pad mount
3
fails
Power button
1
LED indicator
2
automatically
are not operated
the following
in
in
standby
1 Power
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
LED
2
•
•
•
•
•
•
NOTE
•
button
the
When
seconds
When
with
the
seconds
paired,
When
seconds
2
turn
the
power
seconds
2
When
power
seconds
paired,
power
the
is
the
to
on,
the
on,
button
When
will
When
two
When
indicator
When
blinks
When
the
When
lights
When
in
When
paired
in
pairing
LED
the power
up
in
3-second
in
3-second
blinks
green
3-second
in
the power
in
low voltage mode:
in
in
in
in
When
When
- When
- When
button
power
power
the
power
the
with
the
pressed
power
the
with
standby.
glasses
30
pressing
turn
will
glasses
30
pressing
turn
will
30
the
is
button
with the lV, the
and
red
is
blinks
green
in
mode, the
3D
intervals.
mode, the
2D
intervals.
green
3D mode, the LED blinks
3-second
2D mode, the LED
intervals.
3 Nose pad mount
The
dedicated
nose
pressed
is
pairing
off,
pressed
is
button
the
on,
power
turn
will
power
more
or
2
for
pressed
is
button
the
off,
power
mode
30
in
are
button
power
the
glasses
30
the
mode
20
in
are
button
power
the
glasses
30
the
be
glasses
pressed
will
for
less
green.
completed
green
in
turned
is
successfully,
for 3 seconds.
on,
for 3 seconds.
LED
LED
turned
is
off,
3 times.
interval~.
blinks
be
can
pad
more
or
2
for
TV
the
with
or
2
for
turns
power
power
the
if
off
seconds.
less
for
glasses
30
the
with
less
for
mode.
20
to
the
with
less
for
30
to
non-reactive
seconds.
2
than
light
LED
LED
the
green
in
blinks
blinks
in
LED
the
3 times
3 times
mounted
starts.
more
off.
than
than
than
mode.
if
in
red
in
red
in
here.
supplied
the
Attach either
as when the
come with a
Removing the nose pad Attaching the nose pad
of
glasses
and
large
do
nose pads as needed (such
not fit properly). The
nose pad.
small
glasses
Before using the 3D
insulating
EN-6
Glasses
sheet attached
for the first time, remove the
them.
to
Page 71
Using the
3D
Glasses
Using
To
and
•
To
that 3D images are displayed on the TV screen.
• When the power button is pressed for 2
seconds with the
When pairing
in
•
To
power button.
tbe
ID
Glasses
view 3D images, it
TV.
confirm pairing
green for 3 seconds.
switch between 2D and 3D modes, briefly press the
is
necessary
of
the
3D
power
off, pairing with the TV starts.
is
completed successfully, the LED blinks
to
pair the
glasses and lY, make sure
or
3D
glasses
more
The battery has an expected service life
100 hours.
• When replacing the button battery, use only the
designated battery (Maxell branded CR2025 lithium
button battery).
1 Use
2 While pressing in on
the
tip
of
a ballpoint pen
press in on
in
the
• Pull the battery holder
the
lock.
groove and pull
the
lock, place
out
the
all
of
approximately
or
similar
your
battery holder.
the way out.
object
fingertip
to
~·
(50 cm)-6'56" (2m)
~
NOTE
• When paired, make sure that the 3D glasses are kept
at a distance
If
too
close, pairing cannot be performed.
When viewing 3D images, you can press the power
button
to
useful when several people are viewing 3D images on the
same TV with some people wanting
some people wanting
• Viewing
When you press and hold the
than 2 seconds while viewing 3D images, the LED
light blinks
images.
of
1 .64-6.56 ft (50
switch between 2D and
to
watch
in
20
images
in
red and the
3D
cm-2
m)
from the
3D
modes. This
to
watch
in
2D.
power
button for less
images switch
TV.
is
3D and
to
2D
.
F~rr
3 Replace
G)
Use
remove
®Insert a new
Insert
•
CD
4 Align
the
30
Glasses
• Press it
J~
the
battery.
the
tip
of
the
battery.
the battery
battery
and
in
until it locks.
·~
a ballpoint pen
battery.
with
the
negative
@~~
holder
with
slide
it
back
or
similar
side 8
the
battery
into place.
object
facing
slot
on
to
up.
the
• Viewing
When you press and hold the
than 2 seconds while viewing 2D images, the LED
light blinks
3D images.
30
images
in
green and the 2D images switch
power
button for less
to
NOTE
• Take care not
when loading the battery.
• Used batteries should be disposed of strictly
accordance
to
reverse the battery poles
with
the applicable local laws and regulations.
EN-7
{Ef>
and 8)
in
Page 72
Using the
30
Glasses
NOTE
• These 3D Glasses are only for use with SHARP LCD TVs supporting 3D.
•
30
Glasses lenses
• Do not apply pressure
• Do not scratch the surface
damage the 3D Glasses and reduce the quality
• Use only the cloth provided with the 3D Glasses
to
the lenses
of
of
the lenses
the 3D Glasses. Also,
of
the 3D Glasses with a pointed instrument
of
the 3D image.
to
clean the lenses.
do
not drop
or
bend the 3D Glasses.
• Caution during viewing
• Do not use devices that emit strong electromagnetic waves (such as cellular phones
3D
the 3D Glasses. Doing so may cause the
• The 3D Glasses cannot operate fully
usage temperature range.
in
• If the 3D Glasses are used
In
this case, either darken
• Wear the 3D Glasses correctly.
back-to-front.
• Other displays (such as computer screens, digital clocks, and calculators) may appear
wearing the 3D Glasses. Do not wear the 3D Glasses when watching anything other than
• If you lie on your side while watching the TV with
• Be sure
you may not
• The
glasses
possible from the 3D Glasses.
• Stop using this product
- When images consistently appear doubled while you are wearing the 3D Glasses
- When you have difficultly perceiving
• If the
eye fatigue, headaches and illness.
• If you have any abnormal skin reaction, stop using the 3D Glasses.
due
• If your nose
caused
to
stay within the viewing angle and optimum TV viewing distance when watching
be
able
to
3D
Glasses may not
or
TV.
If this occurs, turn off the other 3D product
3D
Glasses are faulty
to
an allergic reaction
or
temples become red
by
long periods
a room with fluorescent lighting (60 Hz), the light within the room may appear
or
turn off the fluorescent lights when using the 3D Glasses.
enjoy the full 3D effect.
work
in
any
or
to
the coating
of
use may lead
at
3D
images will not be correctly visible if the 3D Glasses are
properly if there
of
the following situations:
damaged,
or
Glasses
extreme high
the
3D
effect
stop
using them immediately. Continued use
or
materials used.
you experience any pain
to
such reactions and may result
to
malfunction.
or
low temperatures. Please use them within the specified
3D
Glasses, the picture may look dark
is
any other 3D product
or
electronic devices
or
electronic devices turned
In
very rare instances, such reactions may
or
itchiness, stop using the
in
skin irritation.
or
or
keep
or
other object. Doing so may
wireless transceivers) near
to
worn
upside
down
dark
and difficult
3D
images.
or
may not be visible.
3D
images. Otherwise,
the
devices as far away as
of
the
3D
Glasses may cause
3D
Glasses. Pressure
on
near the
to
view while
flicker.
or
be
Problem
• Images displayed
appear doubled while you are
wearing the 3D Glasses.
in
3D mode
[§]
• Images displayed
appear 2D while you are wearing
the 3D Glasses.
in
3D mode
[QJ
Possible Solution
• Is the
• Press the power button for
• Are the 3D Glasses set
• Press the
power
of
the 3D Glasses turned on?
Glasses.
to
2D mode?
power
button while viewing 2D images, the LED light blinks
green and the 2D images switch
at
least 2 seconds
to
3D images.
to
turn on the 3D
in
EN-8
Page 73
Specifications
Product 3D Glasses
Model number AN-3DG40
Lens type Uquid crystal shutter
Power supply
Battery Uthium button battery (CR2025
Battery life
Dimension
Weight
Operating temperature 50°F
~
x H x
D)
DC3V
00
hours
of
Approx. 1
3
6
Approx. 0.06831bs./31.0 g (including the lithium button battery)
or
range.)
The
product serial number
the left. The first three digits represent the date of manufacture.
5
x 1
/
4
low
x 6
/
6
to
104
°F/1
temperatures. Please use them within the specified usage temperature
continuous use
2
inch/171.2 x 46.0 x 162.4
/
5
ooc
to
40°C (The
is
displayed
x
1)
mm
3D
Glasses cannot operate fully at extreme high
on
the
3D
Glasses
as
indicated
in
the illustration
I ENGLISH I
on
Month
of
manufacture
1:
1
2:2
3:3
Day
of
manufacture
1:1
2:2
3:3
· ·
8:8
9:9
A:10
8:11
C:12
..._
__
NOTE
• Please contact your local authority for the correct method
The 3D Glasses can be used
The 3D Glasses turn off automatically after 15 seconds if
by
receiving a signal sent from the
no
• Operating range
From directly in front
(within approx. 30° horizontally and 20° vertically)
of
the
3D
emitter on the
lV:
approx.17 ft
*
A:10
B:
11
H:
17
J : 18
N
:22
p
:23
W:30
x_:_3_1_,
of
signal is received from the
*
"1",
disposal
lV.
(5
m)
"0", "Y" and "Z"
of
this product
are
not used.
and/or
TV
packing.
Page 74
SHAR~
SHARP ELECTRONICS CORPORATION
Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, New Jersey 07 495-1163
SHARP CORPORATION
Page 75
SHARR
AQuos·
World class
support
AQUOS Advantage
FREE
*Personal
* Dedicated live
*Online diagnostics
MEMBER
set-up
BENEFITS
assistance
agent
support
and
priority services
with
Live
5
M
INCLUDE:
line
Page 76
LIVE
CONNECTED
SERVICES*
• Dedicated AQUOS® advisors ready
phone and through your
• Facilitate
product
setup including personalized settings
Wi-Fi
to
assist you by
• Systems checkup
PRIORITY
SERVICES**
• Same business day service scheduling
• Expedited turnaround times
• Access
to
live web chat
for
service visits
DEDICATED MEMBER SUPPORT LINE
•
Caii1-87-SEE-AQUOS
AQUOS® advisor
for
direct
connection
to
an
• Extended hours
ACCESS
• Exclusive
TO MEMBER WEBSITE
content
including
tips, live web chat and offers
MORE WAYS
TO
CONNECT
LOVE YOUR
SHARE
~
YOUR
www.sharpusa.com
WITH
NEW
EXPERIENCE
SHARP
AQUOS
LED?
IJ www.facebook.com/SharpAQUOS
C www.twitter.com/SharpAQUOS
product
for
Benefits are available only
in
the
50
For
more information
conditions, visit www.aquosadvantage.com or call us
1-87-SEE-AQUOS
Sharp and AQUOS are registered trademarks of Sharp
Corporation.
to
utilize
available on
based on location and availability.
For
Canadian customers: Please visit
www.sharp.ca/ aq uosadvantage
information on AQUOS Advantage benefits available
in
Canada.
updates, insider
special promotions
to
Sharp customers residing
United States.
or
*An
active Internet connection
connected
all
models
for a copy of
(1-877-332-7867).
services.
**
Access
LIVE
the
Services are not
to
priority services
to
access
terms and
is
required
at
Clientele Canadienne: Veuillez visiter
www.sharp.cafaquosadvantage pour en savoir plus sur
le programme Avantage AQUOS au Canada.
TGAN-B767WJZZ
Page 77
Product Registration Department
(Please
do
not
send
anbj
products
or
other
co
#
TCADEA290WJZZ
UP
L
01
rrespondence
to
this address)
SHAR~
First
-Class
Postage
Required.
Post
w
il
l
n
ot
without
postage.
Office
deliver
proper
SHAR~
PO BOX
DENVER,
111·1111··11•1111·1111111·11·11111·1·1111111
171
098
CO 80217-1098
1
1
11'1111
1111·1·111••
Why
~
~
~
Should
You Register?
Convenience
Notifications
Confirmation
PLEASE
Register
of
T
odabJ!
PRODUCT
REGISTRATION
IMPORTANT!
Return
Immediately
Ownership
www.sharpusa.com/register
Page 78
SHAR~
REGISTER
Why
DON'T
Should
~
~
CONVENIENCE
you ever need warranty service, your product information is
If
NOTIFICATIONS
Proper registration
any
CONFIRMATION
case
In
serve
will
FORGET
Protect
NOW
You
to
Register?
will enable us
product notification.
OF
flood,
to
you are busy,
-
of
We
loss due
your proof
as
know
Your
contact
to
OWNERSHIP
or theft, your product registration
fire
purchase.
of
registering is important, quick and easy!
but
Product!
you in
the
event
already
of
on
file
.
Flli
~
Mr.
0
1.
l.
name
First
address:
E-mail
purchase:
of
Date
2.
F1
0
2.
I
Day
Con
3.
Month
Model
number
back
Mrs.
of unit):
www.sharpusa.com/register
•
Miss
3.
Year
. 4.
Ms
0
0
Initial
Last name
5. Serial
Name
6.
number
store
of
back of unit):
Con
where
purchased:
UP
01
L
:
ax)
es t
paid (excludes
Price
4.
n I
LJ
sal
in
e
By
Advantage program.
Failure
Copyright c 20
www
registering
etum
r
to
TV
diminish
not
will
served. Printed
Re
LCD
your
Aquas Advantage
an
card
this
Rights
All
11
.sharpusa.
completing this form.
and
rights.
nty
a
warr
Plaaaa
o.
ic
x
Me
In
com/r
aee1
with
be
ill
w
you
Do
tape.
gister
e
automatically
staple.
not
enrollee
uos
Aq
Sharp
the
in
Loading...